JP6704663B2 - Amusement machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine capable of shifting to a specific gaming state advantageous to a player.

For example, in a pachinko game machine, a game medium such as a game ball wins (passes) a predetermined area provided on a game board to shift to a specific game state (big hit game state, etc.) advantageous to the player. It is determined whether or not, and when a determination result indicating that the transition is made is obtained, the game is shifted to the specific game state.

In the specific game state, the variable winning device is in the easy winning state (open state) as a plurality of advantageous games (round games, etc.), and when the game medium is won in the variable winning device in the easy winning state, the game is given to the player. A game value such as a medium is added. When the predetermined number of game media wins, the variable winning device finishes one advantageous game and enters a difficult winning state (closed state).

In addition, as a conventional game machine of this type, a variable winning device is defined by temporarily storing a predetermined number of game media and collectively releasing the stored game media at one time. There has been proposed one provided with a storage device that enables winning of more than one game medium (see Patent Document 1).

JP, 2004-313481, A

However, with the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, it is not possible to give notice of novel contents rich in unexpectedness and variety, and it is not possible to enhance the interest in the specific gaming state.

The present invention has been made in view of the above points, and provides a gaming machine capable of performing notification of novel contents rich in surprisingness and variety, and enhancing interest in a specific gaming state. With the goal.

In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machine.
The present invention is
A game board having a game area in which a game medium can be rolled,
A passage area provided in the game area, through which a game medium can pass,
A determination means for determining whether or not to shift to a specific game state, which is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state, on condition that the game medium has passed through the passage area,
Game state transition means for transitioning to the specific game state based on the determination result of the determination means,
A variable winning device that is displaceable between an open state where it is easy to receive a game medium and a closed state where it is more difficult to receive a game medium than the open state,
An effect pattern determination means for determining an effect pattern based on the specific game state transferred by the game state transfer means,
Based on the effect pattern determined by the effect pattern determination means, effect execution means for executing an effect in the specific game state,
A gaming machine equipped with
In the specific game state, it is possible to execute a plurality of round games for controlling the opening and closing of the variable winning device,
In the specific game state, while the round game can be executed the same number of times, the first specific game state in which the variable winning device is opened and closed in a first opening/closing pattern, and the variable winning device is the first opening/closing pattern Including a second specific game state that opens and closes in a different second opening and closing pattern,
Even in the middle of the opening and closing control, if a predetermined number of winnings occur in the variable winning device, it is possible to execute control to end the round game of that time,
Regarding the display regarding the planned number of prizes that changes according to the opening/closing pattern of the variable winning device in one specific game state, the effect execution means initially displays a predetermined planned number of prizes at the start of the specific game state. After that, the initial display can be continuously displayed even after the round game is completed, and when the subsequent round game is started , the number of prizes displayed in the predetermined round game to be executed earlier than , The number of planned prizes that is different from the initial display increases depending on the round game to be executed so that the number of planned prizes displayed in a specific round game executed after the predetermined round game becomes larger. It is possible to execute addition display production,
It is characterized in that the total number of planned prizes by the addition display effect in the first specific game state and the total number of planned prizes by the addition display effect in the second specific game state are different.
Further, the present invention is
The predetermined scheduled prize number by the initial display at the start of the first specific game state and the predetermined scheduled prize number by the initial display at the start of the second specific game state are the same. And

A gaming machine according to one aspect of the present invention,
A game board having a game area in which a game medium can be rolled,
A passage area provided in the game area, through which a game medium can pass,
A displacement member displaceable between a first mode in which a game medium easily passes and a second mode in which it is difficult to pass through the passage area;
A game medium assigning means capable of imparting a game medium in response to the game medium passing through the passage area;
Advantageous game executing means capable of executing one advantageous game from a plurality of advantageous games advantageous to the player based on a predetermined condition,
A passage positioned at a first position with respect to the displacement member when the displacement member is in the first mode, and positioned at a second position with respect to the displacement member when the displacement member is in the second mode. And a forming member,
The passage forming member,
When located at the second position with respect to the displacement member, it is possible to form a passage capable of suppressing the traveling speed of the game medium flowing into the displacement member together with the displacement member, and the displacement A flow path capable of suppressing the traveling speed of the game medium is formed on the upstream side of the displacement member even when located at the first position with respect to the member,
When located at the first position, by not forming at least a part of the passage together with the displacement member, the traveling speed of the game medium that has flowed into the displacement member is not suppressed as compared with when located at the second position. Is possible
When at least a part of the passage is not formed, it is possible to guide the game medium flowing into the displacement member to the passage area,
In the advantageous game, the displacement mode of the displacement member differs depending on the type of the advantageous game,
In the advantageous game, an informing means capable of informing at least a part of the planned amount to be imparted based on the number of imparted game media per game medium that has passed through the passage area and the type of advantageous game being executed. It is characterized by having.

According to such a configuration, the traveling speed of the game medium can be suppressed by the passage forming member without using a device that is operated separately from the displacement member, and the passage forming member is changed to the first mode. With this, it is possible to guide the game medium to the passage area without suppressing the traveling speed. As a result, the number of passages of the game medium to the passage area can be adjusted without separately providing a storage device, etc., and it is possible to suppress an increase in the number of parts and cost, and solve a heat problem around the game board. ..

A preferred embodiment of the present invention is
In the case of the second aspect, the displacement member has a portion that becomes lower as it progresses from one end to the other end, and has a support surface that supports the game medium from below,
The passage region is formed at least below the other end of the support surface,
The passage is formed by the support surface and the passage forming member,
When the displacement member is in the second mode, the game medium is rollable along the path from one end to the other end of the support surface,
When the displacement member is in the first mode, the game medium can roll from one end to the other end of the support surface without following the passage.

According to such a configuration, when the displacement member is in the second mode, the game medium is guided along the passage formed by the support surface and the passage forming member from one end of the support surface to the other end, and is displaced. When the member is in the first mode, it is possible to smoothly guide the game medium from the other end of the support surface to the passage area without passing along the passage.

A preferred embodiment of the present invention is
When the displacement member is in the second mode, the game medium rolling along the passage is provided with a discharge port capable of being discharged to the outside of the passage before being guided to the passage area. To do.

With such a configuration, at least a part of the game medium, the progress of which is suppressed by the passage, is guided to the outside of the game area through the outlet before being guided to the passage area. It is possible to prevent the game medium from passing through.

A preferred embodiment of the present invention is
Launching means capable of launching a game medium to the game area,
A starting passage area that is provided separately from the passage area in the game area and through which a game medium can pass,
A game value giving means capable of giving a game value on the condition that the game medium has passed through the passage area;
Specific game state transition determining means for determining whether or not to shift to a specific game state advantageous to the player on condition that the game medium has passed through the starting passage area,
Specific game state control means capable of controlling to a specific game state on condition that a determination result indicating that the specific game state transition determination means has been obtained,
In the specific game state, an advantageous game execution means capable of executing an advantageous game for displacing the displacement member to the first mode at least once,
The advantageous game ends on the condition that a prescribed number of game media have passed through the passage area,
When the displacement member is in the second mode, a predetermined number of game media can be flowed in,
In the specific game state, the advantageous game execution means causes the displacement member before executing the advantageous game to be in the second mode for a specific number of game media to be emitted to the displacement member by the emission means. It is possible to control so that it will be a specific time to flow in,
When the displacement member is in the first mode after the specific time elapses, the game medium that has flowed into the displacement member passes through the passage area, thereby defining the number of passages of the passage area in the advantageous game. Can be more than a few,
In the specific game state, the number of game values provided by the game value providing unit per game medium that has passed through the passage area, and the number of executions of the advantageous game executed by the advantageous game execution unit, A planned awarding quantity determining means for determining a planned affixing quantity of a game value in a specific game state based on a planned passage number of a game medium that can pass through the passage area according to the specific time,
Reporting means capable of reporting at least a part of the planned grant quantity determined by the scheduled grant quantity determining means.

With such a configuration, the number of game values provided each time the game medium passes through the passage area, the number of times of execution of the advantageous game, and the displacement member before the execution of the advantageous game become the second mode. Based on the planned number of passages of the game medium that can pass through the passage area in accordance with the specified time, the planned value-added quantity of the game value in the specific game state is calculated, and at least a part of the planned value-added quantity is notified. As a result, it is possible to inform about how much game value is given in the specific game state with novel contents that are rich in surprisingness and variety, which in turn can enhance the interest in the specific game state. ..

A preferred embodiment of the present invention is
Launching means capable of launching a game medium to the game area,
A starting passage area that is provided separately from the passage area in the game area and through which a game medium can pass,
A game value giving means capable of giving a game value on the condition that the game medium has passed through the passage area;
Specific game state transition determining means for determining whether or not to shift to a specific game state advantageous to the player on condition that the game medium has passed through the starting passage area,
Specific game state control means capable of controlling to a specific game state on condition that a determination result indicating that the specific game state transition determination means has been obtained,
In the specific game state, an advantageous game execution means capable of executing an advantageous game for displacing the displacement member to the first mode at least once,
The advantageous game ends on the condition that a prescribed number of game media have passed through the passage area,
When the displacement member is in the second mode, a predetermined number of game media can be flowed in,
During the execution of the advantageous game, the advantageous game execution means has a time necessary for the first number of game media less than the specified number to be emitted by the emission means and pass through the second passage area. After the displacement member is set to the first mode for the first time, the displacement member is displaced to the second mode, and the second time that is the second mode is defined by the sum of the first number and the second time. It is possible to control so that it is time for a second number of game media exceeding the number to be launched by the launch means and flow into the displacement member.
When the displacement member is in the first mode after the second time has elapsed, the game medium that has flowed into the displacement member passes through the passage region, and thus the number of passages of the passage region in the advantageous game is described above. It is possible to exceed the specified number,
In the specific game state, the number of game values provided by the game value providing unit per game medium that has passed through the passage area, and the number of executions of the advantageous game executed by the advantageous game execution unit, A scheduled awarding quantity determining means for determining a scheduled awarding quantity of a game value in a specific game state based on a planned passage number of a game medium that can pass through the passage area according to the first time and the second time;
Reporting means capable of reporting at least a part of the planned grant quantity determined by the scheduled grant quantity determining means.

According to such a configuration, the number of game values provided each time the game medium passes through the passage area, the number of times of execution of the advantageous game, and the displacement member are the first aspect and the second aspect. Based on the expected number of passages of the game medium that can pass through the passage area in accordance with the first time and the second time, the planned value-added quantity of the game value in the specific game state is calculated, and at least a part of the number of the planned value-added. Since it is possible to inform, it is possible to inform about how much game value is given in the specific game state with novel contents rich in surprisingness and variety, and eventually enhance the interest in the specific game state. be able to.

According to the present invention, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of giving notification of novel contents rich in surprises and varieties and enhancing interest in a specific gaming state.

It is an external perspective view of the gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a front view of the gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a front view of a game board in the game machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a main-part enlarged perspective view of the game board in the game machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a front view of the LED unit in the gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a block diagram showing a control circuit of a game machine concerning a 1st embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows the specification of the game machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the 1 round opening/closing pattern of the game machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the special winning opening opening/closing pattern and the interval between rounds of the game machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a diagram for explaining the specifications of the special winning opening shutter of the gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows the addition pattern selection table of the game machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the addition pattern table of the game machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the addition character selection table of the game machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flow chart which shows the main processing by the main control circuit of the game machine concerning a 1st embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows the main processing by the main control circuit of the game machine concerning a 1st embodiment of the present invention. It is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process of the gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows switch input processing of the game machine concerning a 1st embodiment of the present invention. It is the flowchart which shows the special design related switch check processing of the game machine which relates to 1st execution form of this invention. It is a flow chart which shows the 1st starting opening switch check processing of the game machine concerning a 1st embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows the 2nd starting opening switch check processing of the game machine concerning a 1st embodiment of the present invention. It is a flowchart showing a special winning opening switch check process of the gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a flowchart showing a special symbol control process of the gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is the flowchart which shows the special design memory check processing of the game machine which relates to 1st execution form of this invention. It is a flowchart showing a special symbol determination process of the gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is the flowchart which shows the special design fluctuation time management processing of the game machine which relates to 1st execution form of this invention. It is a flowchart showing a special symbol display time management process of the gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows hit start interval management processing of the game machine concerning a 1st embodiment of the present invention. It is the flowchart which shows the waiting time management processing before the special winning opening reopening of the game machine which relates to 1st execution form of this invention. It is a flowchart showing a special winning opening opening process of the gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a flowchart showing a hit end interval management process of the gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is the flowchart which shows the special design game ending processing of the game machine which relates to 1st execution form of this invention. It is a flow chart which shows the main processing by the sub control circuit of the game machine concerning a 1st embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows command reception interruption processing of the game machine concerning a 1st embodiment of the present invention. It is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process of the gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows command analysis processing of the game machine concerning a 1st embodiment of the present invention. It is the flowchart which shows the hit production pattern decision processing of the game machine which relates to 1st execution form of this invention. It is the flowchart which shows the production processing during the round of the game machine which relates to 1st execution form of this invention. It is the flowchart which shows the hit end production processing of the game machine which relates to 1st execution form of this invention. It is a diagram for explaining the operation of the special winning opening shutter of the gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a diagram for explaining the operation of the special winning opening shutter of the gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure for demonstrating the operation timing relevant to the special winning opening of the game machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of a screen display of the addition bonus of the game machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of a screen display of the addition bonus of the game machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of a screen display of the addition bonus of the game machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the specification of the game machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the 1 round opening/closing pattern of the game machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the special winning opening opening/closing pattern and the interval between rounds of the game machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the addition pattern selection table of the game machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the addition pattern table of the game machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the addition character selection table of the game machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a flow chart which shows hit start interval management processing concerning a 2nd embodiment of the present invention. It is the flowchart which shows the waiting time management processing before the special winning opening reopening of the game machine which relates to the 2nd execution form of this invention. It is a flowchart showing a special winning opening opening process of the gaming machine according to the second embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows hit end interval management processing of a game machine concerning a 2nd embodiment of the present invention. It is the flowchart which shows the hit production pattern decision processing of the game machine which relates to the 2nd execution form of this invention. It is the flowchart which shows the hit end production processing of the game machine which relates to the 2nd execution form of this invention. It is a figure for explaining operation of the special winning opening shutter of the game machine concerning a 2nd embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure for explaining operation of the special winning opening shutter of the game machine concerning a 2nd embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure for explaining operation timing of the game machine concerning a 2nd embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows the example of a screen display of the addition bonus of the game machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the 1 round opening/closing pattern of the game machine which concerns on 3rd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the special winning opening opening/closing pattern and the interval between rounds of the game machine which concerns on 3rd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the addition bonus effect pattern selection table for the game machine which concerns on 3rd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure for explaining the 1st modification of a special winning opening shutter. It is a figure for demonstrating operation|movement of the special winning opening shutter which concerns on a 1st modification. It is a figure for demonstrating operation|movement of the special winning opening shutter which concerns on a 1st modification. It is a front view which shows the 2nd modification of a game board and a variable winning a prize device. It is a perspective view showing the 3rd modification of a variable winning a prize device. It is a perspective view which shows the principal part of the variable winning a prize device which concerns on a 3rd modification. It is a disassembled perspective view which decomposes|disassembles and shows the variable winning a prize device which concerns on a 3rd modification. It is an exploded perspective view showing an internal structure of a variable winning a prize device concerning the 3rd modification. It is a disassembled perspective view which decomposes|disassembles and shows the variable winning device which concerns on a 3rd modification from another direction. It is a top view showing the internal structure of the variable winning a prize device concerning the 3rd modification. It is a right side view showing a variable winning a prize device concerning the 3rd modification. It is a left side view showing a variable winning a prize device concerning the 3rd modification. It is a sectional view showing a variable winning a prize device concerning the 3rd modification. It is a sectional view showing a variable winning a prize device concerning the 3rd modification. It is a perspective view showing a drive unit of a variable winning a prize device concerning the 3rd modification. It is a disassembled perspective view which decomposes|disassembles and shows some drive units of the variable winning a prize device which concerns on a 3rd modification. It is a top view showing the main components of the variable winning a prize device concerning the 4th modification. It is a front view showing the main components of the variable winning a prize device concerning the 4th modification. It is a figure for explaining opening-and-closing operation of the variable winning a prize device concerning the 4th modification. It is a top view showing the main components of the variable winning a prize device concerning the other example of the 4th modification. It is a top view showing the main components of the variable winning a prize device concerning the other example of the 4th modification. It is a figure for explaining opening-and-closing operation of the variable winning a prize device concerning the other example of the 4th modification. It is a top view showing the main components of the variable winning a prize device concerning the 5th modification. It is a figure for explaining opening-and-closing operation of the variable winning a prize device concerning the 5th modification. It is a top view showing the main components of the variable winning a prize device concerning the other example of the 5th modification. It is a top view showing the main components of the variable winning a prize device concerning the other example of the 5th modification. It is a figure for explaining opening-and-closing operation of the variable winning a prize device concerning the other example of the 5th modification.

Embodiments of the present invention will be described below with reference to the drawings.

1 and 2 are an external perspective view and a front view of a gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 3 is a front view of a game board used in the game machine of this embodiment. FIG. 4 is an enlarged perspective view of a main part of the game board. FIG. 5 is a front view of the LED unit provided on the game board. The gaming machine of this embodiment is applied to a pachinko gaming machine as an example.

[Structure of game machine]
First, an overview of a pachinko gaming machine as a gaming machine will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 5.

As shown in FIG. 1 and FIG. 2, the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment is a body frame base on which a game board 1 (see FIG. 3) having a game area in which game balls can roll down is detachably provided. A main frame 2 having a plate 2a (also referred to as a main frame base), and a front frame base plate 3a (also referred to as a front frame base) provided with an opening 3h through which the game board 1 can be visually recognized (hereinafter referred to as a front frame opening) A front frame 3 that is rotatably supported by the main body frame 2 in front of the main body frame 2 (on the side of the player), and a liquid crystal display device 4 for performing a predetermined effect display (see FIG. 3). A rear frame base plate (not shown) detachably provided, and a rear frame (not shown) rotatably supported by the main frame 2 at the rear of the main frame 2 (opposite to the player). I have it.

The pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment is attached to island equipment (not shown) via the outer frame 6. The body frame 2 is rotatably supported by the outer frame 6 via a body frame hinge 2b. 1 shows a state in which the front frame 3 is closed with respect to the main frame 2 and the main frame 2 is closed with respect to the outer frame 6, and in this state, the rear frame is , It is housed in the outer frame 6 and thus not shown.

The table frame 3 has a table frame base plate 3a and various table frame constituent members provided in the table frame base plate 3a. The front frame constituent members include the protective glass 7, the dish unit 8, the operation unit 9, the speakers 10a to 10b, various decorative members (top decoration 14, right decoration member 15, left decoration member 16) and the like. It should be noted that the table frame constituent members are not limited to these, and include all the members forming the table frame 3. Further, in the plate unit 8, respective cover members (upper plate upper cover 8a, lower plate cover 8b, etc.) are attached to the front frame base plate 3a through a locking structure described later.

In the front frame 3, the front frame opening 3h described above is provided with a protective glass 7 having transparency. The protective glass 7 is detachably attached to the front frame base plate 3a provided on the front frame 3 to the front frame opening 3h (window portion) from the back side (back side) of the front frame base plate 3a. It is configured to face the front surface (front surface) side of the game board 1 and cover the front surface (front surface) side with the front frame 3 closed with respect to the main body frame 2. Speakers 10a and 10b for producing a sound are provided on the upper side of the front frame 3 on both sides above the front frame opening 3h.

Further, on the surface (front surface) of the front frame 3, a decorative member for improving the aesthetic appearance is provided so as to surround the front frame opening 3h. As an example of a decoration member, a top decoration 14 having a patrol accessory described later therein is provided on the upper side of the front frame opening 3h, and a light emitting display mode is provided on the left and right of the front frame opening 3h. A right decoration member 15 (for example, an upper right lens 15a, a right middle lens 15b, a right panel cover 15c, etc.) that can be changed, and a left decoration member 16 (for example, a left outer lens 16a) are provided.

Inside the right decoration member 15 and the left decoration member 16, a light emitting means (for example, a lamp/LED 27 etc.) controlled by a sub-control circuit 70 (see FIG. 6) described later is provided (see FIG. 6). . The light emitted from the lamp/LED 27 is transmitted through the right side decoration member 15 and the left side decoration member 16, and is sensed by the right side decoration member 15 and the left side decoration member 16 as radiant light or diffused light having an excellent appearance. As a result, it is possible to change the display mode by light, so that the interest in the game can be improved.

Further, a dish unit 8 is provided on the front surface (front surface) of the front frame 3 below the front frame opening 3h of the front frame base plate 3a. The plate unit 8 is provided with an upper plate 17 for storing rental balls and prize balls, and a lower plate 18 provided below the upper plate 17 and capable of storing, for example, game balls overflowing when the upper plate 17 is full. Is provided.

The lower plate 18 includes a lower plate body 18p capable of storing game balls and a lower plate cover 8b attached so as to cover the upper part of the lower plate body 18p. On the other hand, the upper plate 17 is an upper plate body 17p capable of storing game balls, and an upper plate upper cover 8a detachably attached to the outer frame base plate 3a so as to cover the upper part of the upper plate body 17p, The upper plate 17 is provided with an upper plate decoration member for improving the aesthetic appearance. As an example of the upper plate decoration member, the upper plate body 17p is provided with the upper plate left decoration 17a and the upper plate front decoration 17c so as to surround the upper plate upper cover 8a. Has a shape that is bent from the left side of the upper plate upper cover 8a through the front side and toward the lower plate 18 midway toward the right side.

In the front frame base plate 3a, a payout opening 20 for paying out the game balls to the upper plate 17, and a discharge port (not shown) for discharging the game balls stored in the upper plate 17 to the back side of the front frame base plate 3a. ), and a supply port 21 for supplying the game balls discharged from the discharge port to the lower plate 18. On the back side of the front frame base plate 3a, a ball passage of a game ball that is paid out from the payout device 83 (see FIG. 6), and a ball passage cover that forms a ball passage by connecting the discharge port and the supply port 21 (illustrated) Is omitted) is provided. When the game ball is paid out from the payout device 83, the game ball is sent to the upper plate 17 through the payout opening 20, while the game ball is paid out, but the more the game ball stays near the payout opening 20, the upper plate 17 Is full, or when the ball removal button 22 provided on the upper plate upper cover 8a is pressed, the game balls stored in the upper plate 17 are discharged from the outlet through the ball passage and the supply port 21 to the lower plate. Sent to 18.

In the present embodiment, a plated member is used for the decoration of the front surface of the gaming machine, and the plated member 17b is also used for the upper plate front decoration 17c that decorates the front part of the upper plate 17. By using the plated member 17b, the decorative effect of the external design of the gaming machine is enhanced to enhance the interest of the player.

On the upper plate upper cover 8a, a ball lending button 23 for receiving a ball lending, a return button 24 for returning a card from a card unit 84 (see FIG. 6) for lending a game ball (not shown), and the like. An operation unit 9 is provided for changing the display mode of various effects by the player's operation (pressing operation, rotating operation) during the game. Although there are no particular restrictions on the arrangement configuration (position, orientation) of the operation unit 9, as an example in the drawing, the press operation button 9A is projected in the vertical direction from the upper plate upper cover 8a, and the outer periphery of the press operation button 9A is shown. The operation unit 9 is shown in which the jog dial 9B is arranged.

Regarding the front frame 3, a portion of the surface (front surface) on the left side (that is, the side rotatably supported by the main body frame 2) as viewed from the player side, for example, an illegal wire such as a piano wire. It is possible to envisage a situation in which a member invades and various components constructed on the back surface of the front frame 3 in the vicinity of the back side of the portion are subjected to an unauthorized act by the unauthorized member.

Therefore, in order to prevent such fraud, a cover member (not shown) with a wiring holding function is provided on the back surface of the front frame 3 at a portion where the above-mentioned fraudulent member performs an intrusion act. The cover member with a wiring holding function includes a wiring holding portion that holds wiring such as a harness, a substrate covering portion that covers a substrate (not shown) constructed on the back surface of the front frame 3, and an illegal member such as a piano wire. It is configured to be integrated with a fraud prevention unit that prevents intrusion. According to this, it is possible to realize a single cover member with a wiring holding function having three functions of wiring holding, substrate covering, and fraud prevention. Therefore, it is necessary to separately prepare members for each of these functions. Is eliminated, and the cost can be reduced accordingly.

The main body frame 2 has a main body frame base plate 2a and various main body frame constituent members provided on the main body frame base plate 2a. The body frame constituent members include the launching device 26, the speaker 10c, various control boards and relay boards, and the like. The body frame constituent members are not limited to these, and all the members constituting the body frame 2 are included.

In the main body frame 2, a main body frame opening (not shown) having substantially the same shape as the front frame opening 3h is provided at a predetermined position of the main body frame base plate 2a facing the front frame opening 3h. In addition, on the surface (front surface) of the main body frame base plate 2a, a launching device 26 for launching a game ball is provided on the lower right side of the main body frame opening.

The launching device 26 includes a panel body 26a for placing the launching device 26 on the lower right side of the front surface of the body frame base plate 2a, a launching handle 26b provided on the front side of the panel body 26a, and a panel body 26a. It is arranged on the lower right side of the surface of the main body frame base plate 2a facing the back side of, and is configured to include a launch drive device (not shown) for launching a game ball.

A cutout 3p for exposing the launching device 26 (panel body 26a, launching handle 26b) to the player side is provided on the lower right side of the front frame 3. When the front frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 2, the firing device 26 (panel body 26a, firing handle 26b) is exposed through the notch 3p of the front frame 3 and is adjacent to the dish unit 8 described above. Positioned. The launching device 26 (panel body 26a, launching handle 26b) and the dish unit 8 have an aesthetic appearance as if they are continuously integrated with each other.

The firing handle 26b is provided with a support portion (not shown), a handle grip 26d that is rotatably attached to the support portion and is rotatable in the clockwise and counterclockwise directions, and is provided in the support portion. Stop switch (not shown) for stopping the discharge of the fire, a fire stop button 26e (also referred to as an operating member) for ON/OFF operation of the fire stop switch, and a handle arranged so as to cover the opening of the handle grip 26d. And a cap 26h.

When the handle grip 26d of the firing handle 26b is rotated in the clockwise direction, the driving force of the firing drive device is increased/decreased in accordance with the amount of rotation (rotation angle), and the driving force at that time stores in the upper plate 17. The game ball being played is launched at a predetermined timing toward the game area 1p (see FIG. 3) of the game board 1. For example, in the present embodiment, the shooting drive device can shoot 90.9 game balls per minute, and can shoot one game ball approximately every 0.66 seconds. At this time, when the firing stop button 26e is operated, the firing drive device is stop-controlled, whereby the firing of the game ball can be stopped.

In this embodiment, the operation control of the firing stop switch and the firing handle 26b is performed by the payout/firing control circuit 82 (see FIG. 6) connected to the main control circuit 60 (see FIG. 6). Inside the launching device 26, a spring member (not shown) for constantly elastically biasing the handle grip 26d in the counterclockwise direction is provided. By rotating the handle grip 26d clockwise, the game ball is launched.

Further, when the player interrupts the game and releases the handle grip 26d, the handle grip 26d is returned to the start point position by the elasticity of the spring member. At this time, the projection of the handle grip 26d (not shown) pushes the firing stop button 26e, so that the firing of the game ball is stopped.

As a method of increasing or decreasing the launch strength of the game ball in the launching device 26, the resistance value of the launch volume (not shown) is changed according to the rotation amount (rotation angle) of the handle grip 26d of the launch handle 26b, By changing the power supplied to the firing solenoid (not shown), the firing strength of the game ball is increased or decreased, but other firing devices are linked to the turning operation of the handle grip of the firing handle. A firing spring (not shown) and a gear mechanism for winding (tightening) the firing spring may be provided. In such a launch device, the amount of rotation of the winding gear mechanism is adjusted by the amount of rotation of the handle grip of the launch handle to increase or decrease the degree of winding (tightening) of the launch spring, thereby increasing or decreasing the game ball. You can increase or decrease the firing intensity of.

The speaker 10c is provided in the center of the lower portion of the main body frame 2 so as to produce a sound. The sound emitted from the speaker 10c is emitted through the speaker cover 10k provided in the part of the plate unit 8 of the front frame 3 (specifically, the part between the upper plate 17 and the lower plate 18). Is becoming

The game board 1 is arranged in front of a rear frame (not shown) so as to be located behind the protective glass 7, and has a game area 1p (see FIG. 3) in which a shot game ball can roll down. is doing. Although the game board 1 is formed of a light-transmitting material (for example, polycarbonate), it may be formed of a non-light-transmitting material such as a plywood board.

As shown in FIGS. 3 to 5, the game board 1 opens and closes the first guide rail 30, the second guide rail 30 ′, the stage 31, the first starting opening 32, the second starting opening 33, and the second starting opening 33. Blade member 34, passage gate 35, big winning opening 37, big winning opening shutter 37A for opening and closing big winning opening 37, a plurality of general winning openings 40, out opening 41, upper movable effect member 42A, lower movable effect member 42B The cover member 43, the liquid crystal display device 4, and the LED unit 5 are provided. In the pachinko gaming machine of the present embodiment, the first starting opening 32, the second starting opening 33, the passage gate 35, the special winning opening 37, and the general winning opening 40 form a passage area through which a game ball can pass. .. The special winning opening shutter 37A is a displacement member that can be displaced into a first mode in which the game ball can easily pass through the passage area (big winning hole 37) and a second mode in which it is difficult to close the game ball. Equivalent to. FIG. 3 shows a state in which the cover member 43 is removed. The special winning opening 37, the special winning opening shutter 37A, and the cover member 43 are provided as parts or parts constituting the variable winning device.

The first guide rail 30 is arranged so as to extend from the left side toward the game board 1 to approximately the center upper portion, and is configured by an outer rail 30A and an inner rail 30B. The outer rail 30A is provided on the main body frame 2 and is arranged so as to surround the entire game area 1p. The inner rail 30B is for guiding the game balls to the upper part of the game board 1 together with the outer rail, and is arranged on the left side of the game board 1 inside the outer rail 30A. The game board 1 is attached to the body frame 2 from the back side thereof.

The second guide rail 30 ′ is arranged so as to extend from the upper right side toward the lower right side toward the game board 1, and is configured by an outer rail 30C and an inner rail 30D. The outer rail 30C and the inner rail 30D are for guiding the game balls from the upper right side of the game board 1 to the special winning opening 37 arranged in the lower right side. On the surfaces of the outer rail 30C and the inner rail 30D facing each other, a plurality of convex portions 30E capable of contacting the game ball flowing down through between the outer rail 30C and the inner rail 30D are provided at predetermined intervals. There is. As a result, the game ball flowing down through the second guide rail 30' is restrained from advancing by repeatedly contacting the convex portion 30E until it is discharged from the lower end of the second guide rail 30', so that a big prize is won. The travel speed of the game ball is effectively reduced by the time it reaches the mouth 37. The lower end of the second guide rail 30' is located near the upper right side of the cover member 43 (see FIG. 4). As a result, the game ball released from the lower end of the second guide rail 30' comes into contact with the upper surface 43a of the cover member 43 described later, and then rolls along the upper surface 43a toward the special winning opening 37. And move. In addition, FIG. 3 shows a form in which the convex portions 30E of the outer rail 30C and the convex portions 30E of the inner rail 30D are arranged at equal intervals along the direction for guiding the game ball while facing each other. The convex portions may be arranged in a staggered arrangement at positions displaced from each other along the direction of guiding the game ball.

The stage 31 distributes the flow areas of the game balls in the game area 1p, and is arranged along the lower edge of the liquid crystal display device 4.

The game ball launched by the launching device 26 flows downward toward the lower side of the game board 1 while changing its traveling direction due to a collision with a game nail (not shown) driven into the game board 1, a stage 31, or the like. In this process, the game balls are collected by winning in any of the first starting opening 32, the second starting opening 33, the big winning opening 37, and the general winning opening 40, and when there is no winning, or when the game passes. When the player has passed through the gate 35 and has not won a prize thereafter, it is collected by being discharged from the outlet 41.

In addition, the winning means that the game ball passes through the passing area or enters the passing area. Specifically, the game ball passes through the passage area or enters the passage area to give a situation advantageous to the player (for example, opening of the second starting opening 33, symbol lottery, prize ball, etc.). Means At this time, passing through the passage area by the game ball means mere passage, and entering the passage area by the game ball means collecting the game ball separately from the outlet 41, which will be described later. Since the winning is detected when the game ball passes by the sensor switch, passing and entering are substantially synonymous. Therefore, both the passage of game balls and the entry of balls into the passage area lead to winning, and therefore, in the following description, the term "winning" is used unless otherwise specified.

When the rotation angle of the firing handle 26b is relatively small, the launching force applied to the game ball is generally small, so the game ball mainly flows down on the left side of the stage 31. Further, when the rotation angle of the firing handle 26b is relatively large, the launching force given to the game ball is generally large, so the game ball flows down the right side of the stage 31 or along the second guide rail 30'. .. In general, the hitting method of letting the game ball flow down to the left side of the stage 31 is called "left hitting", and the hitting method of letting the game ball flow down along the right side of the stage 31 and the second guide rail 30' is " Right-handed."

The first starting opening 32 and the second starting opening 33 give a trigger for the lottery on the condition that the game ball wins (passes), and displays the result of the lottery on the display area 4A of the LED unit 5 and the liquid crystal display device 4. It gives an opportunity to make it happen.

The first starting port 32 is provided at a substantially lower position in the center of the game board 1. When a game ball is won in the first starting port 32, a preset number of game balls are paid out to the upper plate 17 or the lower plate 18 via the payout opening 20 or the supply port 21. The winning of the game ball into the first starting opening 32 is detected by the first starting opening switch 320 (see FIG. 6).

The second starting port 33 is provided immediately below the first starting port 32. When a game ball is won in the second starting port 33, a preset number of game balls are paid out to the upper plate 17 or the lower plate 18 via the payout opening 20 or the supply port 21. Winning difficulty of the second starting opening 33 is determined by the blade member 34 as an ordinary electric accessory. The winning of the game ball into the second starting opening 33 is detected by the second starting opening switch 330 (see FIG. 6).

The blade member 34 opens and closes in the front-back direction of the game board 1 so as to have a forward tilted posture and a retracted posture, and an open state that allows a game ball to enter the second starting opening 33 and a second state. It is a so-called ordinary electric accessory that switches between a closed state that makes it difficult or difficult to win a game ball into the starting opening 33. The blade member 34 is driven by a blade member solenoid 340 (see FIG. 6).

The ordinary electric accessory is not limited to the one that operates the blade member 34 to open and close in the front-rear direction, and for example, a so-called electric tulip type in which the starting opening is widened by rotating the game board 1 in the left-right direction. Alternatively, it may be a tongue-shaped member that opens and closes the starting opening by horizontally moving in the front-back direction of the game board 1.

The passage gate 35 gives an opportunity to open the second starting opening 33. The winning of the game ball to the passage gate 35 is detected by the passage gate switch 350 (see FIG. 6). Even if a game ball wins the passage gate 35, no prize ball is generated.

The special winning opening 37 is opened in a hitting game state (a big hitting game state or the like) which is a game state advantageous to the player. The special winning opening 37 is provided on the lower right side of the game area 1p, and substantially on the right side of the first starting opening 32 and the second starting opening 33. The position at which the special winning opening 37 is arranged is not limited to the above-mentioned position, but can be changed appropriately according to the specifications of the gaming machine.

The special winning opening 37 is an opening having a relatively large dimension in the left-right direction so that a plurality of game balls can win at the same time. The special winning opening 37 is formed by the special winning opening shutter 37A and the cover member 43. The special winning opening 37 is formed as an opening between the front surface of the game board 1 and the cover member 43 when the special winning opening shutter 37A is open, and is closed when the special winning opening shutter 37A is closed. Becomes

The special winning opening shutter 37A is a plate-shaped member having a relatively large longitudinal dimension along the left-right direction so as to cover the special winning opening 37. The short-side dimension of the special winning opening shutter 37A is about the diameter of the game ball. The special winning opening shutter 37A is provided so as to project and retract in the front-back direction of the game board 1. The special winning opening shutter 37A is in a closed state where the game board 1 projects to the front and closes the special winning opening 37, and when retracted to the rear of the game board 1 is in an open state where the special winning opening 37 is opened. .. The upper surface of the special winning opening shutter 37A is an inclined surface that tends to descend to the left relatively gently in the closed state. The special winning opening shutter 37A is openably and closably driven by a special winning opening shutter solenoid 370A (see FIG. 6).

As shown in FIG. 4, the cover member 43 is arranged so as to face the special winning opening shutter 37A. The cover member 43 has an upper surface 43a connected to the closed special winning opening shutter 37A, a front end guide portion 43b, and an opening 43c corresponding to the special winning opening 37. When the cover member 43 is attached to the game board 1, the upper surface 43a extends from below the lower end of the second guide rail 30' to the right end of the special winning opening 37 (opening 43c), and is relatively gentle to the left. Form a slope of tendency. The upper surface 43a is arranged so as to lead to the special winning opening 37 (opening 43c) located at the left end while supporting a plurality of game balls released from the second guide rail 30'. The front end guide portion 43b forms a standing wall and is formed so as to extend from the right end of the upper surface 43a to the left end of the special winning opening 37 (opening 43c). On the inner surface of the front end guide portion 43b, a plurality of convex portions 43d capable of contacting the game ball are provided at predetermined intervals. Further, a plurality of convex portions 1d capable of abutting on the game ball are provided at predetermined intervals on an appropriate portion on the front surface of the game board 1 facing the front end guide portion 43b. The convex portions 1d of the game board 1 and the convex portions 43d of the cover member 43 are arranged in a staggered arrangement at positions displaced from each other along the traveling direction of the game ball. As a result, the game ball rolling along the upper surface 43a and the front end guide portion 43b repeatedly and alternately abuts the convex portions 1d and 43d while moving to the left end of the special winning opening 37 (special winning opening shutter 37A). The progress is suppressed by, and the traveling speed of the game ball is effectively decelerated by the time it passes the special winning opening 37 (big winning opening shutter 37A). The upper surface 43a, the special winning opening shutter 37A, and the front end guide portion 43b form a passage into which the game ball can flow when the special winning opening shutter 37A is closed, and suppress the progress of the inflowing game ball. The suppressing portion 430 is formed. In a state where the cover member 43 is attached to the game board 1, the opening 43c is arranged at a position corresponding to the special winning opening shutter 37A and forms the special winning opening 37. A ball passage (not shown) for collecting game balls and a special winning opening count switch 370 are provided at a portion of the game board 1 located inside such a cover member 43. The game ball dropped from the open special winning opening 37 is guided to the special winning opening count switch 370 through the ball passage, and is detected as a winning by the special winning opening count switch 370. The detailed configuration and operation of the special winning opening 37 will be described later.

One or more general winning openings 40 are provided at appropriate positions on the game board 1. When a game ball is won in the general winning opening 40, a predetermined number of prize balls are paid out by the payout device 83 (see FIG. 6), although the lottery is not performed. The winning of the game ball to the general winning opening 40 is detected by the general winning opening switches 400A and 400B.

In the pachinko gaming machine of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 6, as a normal gaming state controlled by a main control circuit 60 described later, a non-probable variation/non-time saving gaming state, and a special symbol lottery winning probability is non-probable variation/ There is a probability variation game state (special game state) that is higher than the non-time saving game state, and a time saving game state in which the winning probability of the ordinary symbol lottery is higher than the non-probability variation/non time saving game state, and there is a special symbol in the normal game state. When the lottery is won, the big hit game state (specific game state) is entered.

In the time saving game state, since the winning probability of the normal symbol lottery becomes a high probability state, the support of the blade member 34 as the ordinary electric throwing makes it easy to win the second starting opening 33. This state is a so-called "electric support", and it becomes easy to accumulate reserved balls for a special symbol game, which will be described later, and it is possible to suppress the loss of the game balls by winning the second start opening 33. Specifically, the time saving game state is a state where the winning probability of the ordinary symbol lottery is relatively high (time saving game state 1), a state in which the variation time of the special symbol or the normal symbol is relatively short (time saving game state 2). ), which means at least one of the states (time saving game state 3) in which the opening time of the blade member 34 as an ordinary electric accessory is relatively long. For example, the time saving game state includes a state in which the time saving game state 1, the time saving game state 2, and the time saving game state 3 simultaneously proceed in an arbitrary combination. In such a time saving game state, the possibility of shifting to the big hit game state is improved.

In the present embodiment, after the jackpot game state is completed, it definitely shifts to the probability variation/time saving game state (probability variation game status, time saving game state, normal game state), and non-probability variation/non-time saving game state (non-probability variation game state). Therefore, the normal game state, which is the non-time saving game state, is not shifted. On the other hand, if the number of symbol fluctuations (game count) of the special symbol game reaches a predetermined number without transitioning to the big hit game state in the probability variation/time saving game state, the normal game is the non-probability variation game state and the non-time saving game state. It is designed to shift to a state.

Specifically, in the present embodiment, after the jackpot gaming state, 10 special symbol lottery (variable display or stop display of 10 special symbols) in the probability variation/time saving game state is triggered. , Transition to a non-probable variation/non-time saving game state. It should be noted that after the jackpot gaming state ends, the probability variation/time saving game state may be maintained until the next jackpot gaming state. In the following description, the probability variation game state that ends by performing a predetermined number of special symbol lottery like this embodiment is also referred to as ST (SPECIAL 1 TIME) game state.

The upper movable effect member 42A and the lower movable effect member 42B are in a state of being retracted to the back of the game board 1 when not in operation, and appear in front of the display area 4A of the liquid crystal display device 4 when performing a specific effect. It is located in. The upper movable effect member 42A appears in front of the central portion of the display area 4A when a specific effect is performed, and performs a rotating operation and a light emission. The lower movable effect member 42B appears in front of the lower part of the display area 4A and emits light when a specific effect is performed.

The LED unit 5 notifies the player of each game state and lottery result, and as shown in FIG. 5, a normal symbol display portion 51, a normal symbol hold display portion 52, a first special symbol display portion 53, It has a 2 special symbol display unit 54, a first special symbol reservation display unit 55, a second special symbol reservation display unit 56, and a round display unit 59. Although not particularly shown, the lamp/LED 27 (see FIG. 6) arranged on the game board 1 or the like includes a lamp corresponding to a character appearance notification lamp, and a transition to the big hit game state is confirmed. It is adapted to light up (or blink) when part of the special symbol changes in the game state or when an additional character described later appears in the display area 4A of the liquid crystal display device 4 during the big hit game state.

The normal symbol display unit 51 determines whether or not to open the second starting opening 33 by driving the blade member 34 as a normal electric auditory product when the game ball wins the passage gate 35. The result of the lottery for "game" is displayed. The normal symbol display portion 51 includes one LED lamp 511. The LED lamp 511 can be lit in red and blue, for example, and is lit in red in the case of winning in the normal symbol game, and is lit in blue in the case of losing in the ordinary symbol game. When the LED lamp 511 in the normal symbol display portion 51 is turned on, for example, in red, the blade member 34 is driven to open and close in a predetermined pattern to allow the game ball to enter the second starting opening 33. It should be noted that, as the lighting mode according to the winning and loss of the normal symbol game, other lighting modes may be used, for example, in the case of winning, it becomes a lighting state or a blinking state, while in the case of losing it turns off. You can

Ordinary symbol reservation display unit 52, by turning on or off the four LED lamps 521, 522, 523, 524, a new game ball wins the passage gate 35 while the ordinary symbol display unit 51 is performing variable display. When it does, it displays the number of times of execution of the variable display of the normal symbol that is held in order to perform the variable display by the normal symbol display unit 51 from the next time. The four LED lamps 521, 522, 523, 524 are normally located on the left side of the symbol display portion 51, and are arranged side by side with the LED lamp 511 in a row. In the hold display by the LED lamps 521, 522, 523, 524, for example, when the hold number is "1", the LED lamp 521 is turned on and the LED lamps 522, 523, 524 are turned off. When the number of reservations is “2”, the LED lamps 521 and 522 are turned on and the LED lamps 523 and 524 are turned off. When the number of reservations is “3”, the LED lamps 521, 522 and 523 are turned on and the LED lamp 524 is turned off. When the number of reservations is "4", all the LED lamps 521, 522, 523, 524 are turned on.

The first special symbol display section 53 and the second special symbol display section 54 show the result of the winning lottery for the "special symbol game", and include, for example, a 7-segment LED. The first special symbol display unit 53 performs variable display of a symbol (hereinafter, referred to as “first special symbol”) that is identification information triggered by winning a game ball into the first starting opening 32, and first. The result of the winning lottery based on the winning of the starting opening 32 is stopped and displayed as a stop symbol related to the first special symbol. The second special symbol display unit 54 performs a variable display of a symbol (hereinafter, referred to as "second special symbol") which is identification information triggered by winning the game ball to the second starting opening 33, and secondly The result of the winning lottery based on the winning of the starting opening 33 is stopped and displayed as a stop symbol related to the second special symbol.

The variable display of the symbols by the first special symbol display unit 53 and the second special symbol display unit 54 is performed, for example, by using a 7-segment LED or the like, and each segment is individually turned on and off repeatedly. The result of the winning lottery is displayed by a segment pattern (design) formed by turning on/off each segment of the first special symbol display portion 53 and the second special symbol display portion 54. At this time, the plurality of winning symbols displayed in the first special symbol and the plurality of winning symbols displayed in the second special symbol are in different modes. As the winning symbol of the first special symbol, there is a symbol that triggers the transition to the big-hit gaming state, and there is a name big-hit symbol such as "probability variation 1" that indicates the transition to the probability variation gaming state after the termination of the big-hit gaming state. (See Figure 7). As the winning symbol of the second special symbol, a symbol that triggers the transition to the big hit gaming state, and the names such as "probability variation 1" to "probability variation 6" indicating that the transition to the probability variation gaming state after the termination of the big hit gaming state. There is a big hit pattern of, and a nominal small hit pattern such as "small hit" that triggers the transition to a so-called small hit game state (see FIG. 7). That is, the hit symbol of the first special symbol does not have a small hit symbol that triggers the transition to the small hit gaming state, and the hit symbol of the second special symbol does the small hit that triggers the transition to the small hit gaming state. There is a design. The first special symbol display portion 53 and the second special symbol display portion 54 are not limited to the 7-segment LED or the like, and may be, for example, a combination of turning on/off two or more LED lamps.

The first special symbol reservation display unit 55 includes four LED lamps 551, 552, 553, 554, and by turning on or off these LED lamps 551, 552, 553, 554, the first special symbol display unit 53. Or, for the variable display of the first special symbol for the next and subsequent special symbol games when a new game ball is won in the first starting opening 32 during the variable display of the symbols for the special symbol game by the second special symbol display unit 54. The feasible number of times (suspended number) of the variable display of the first special symbol display portion 53 that has been suspended is displayed. The second special symbol reservation display unit 56 includes four LED lamps 561, 562, 563, 564, and by turning on or off these LED lamps 561, 562, 563, 564, the first special symbol display unit 53. Or, the second special symbol display unit 54 is held for the variable display of the symbol for the special symbol game after the next when the new game ball is won in the second starting opening 33 during the variable display of the symbol for the special symbol game. The feasible number of times (variable display number) of the variable display of the second special symbol display portion 54 is displayed. Each of the first special symbol reservation display unit 55 and the second special symbol reservation display unit 56 are arranged side by side vertically, and are located above the ordinary symbol reservation display unit 52. The display mode of the number of reservations on the first special symbol reservation display unit 55 and the second special symbol reservation display unit 56 is the same as the display mode of the number of reservations on the normal symbol reservation display unit 52.

The first special symbol reservation display unit 55 and the second special symbol reservation display unit 56, when the first special symbol display unit 53 or the second special symbol display unit 54 is variably displayed, to the first starting opening 32. The game ball is detected by the first starting port switch 320 (see FIG. 6) provided in the ball passage leading to the second starting port switch 330 (see FIG. 6) provided in the ball passage leading to the second starting port 33. When it is done, execution (start) of variable display of the first special symbol display portion 53 or the second special symbol display portion 54 is suspended. When the symbols that have been variably displayed in the first special symbol display portion 53 or the second special symbol display portion 54 are stopped and displayed, in the first special symbol display portion 53 or the second special symbol display portion 54 that has been suspended. The variable display of symbols is started.

Here, the upper limit is set to the number of times the execution of the variable display of the first special symbol display portion 53 and the second special symbol display portion 54 is suspended, and in the present embodiment, the first starting opening 32 and the The number of variable displays held by the first special symbol display portion 53 and the second special symbol display portion 54 due to the winning of the game ball to the 2 starting port 33 is set to four at maximum. When the first special symbol game for the first special symbol display unit 53 is held four times, the information of the first special symbol game corresponding to the changing first special symbol display unit 53 is the main RAM 63 (Fig. 6) is stored in the first special symbol starting storage area (0) as starting memory (starting memory information), and the information of the four special 1st special symbol games held is the first special symbol starting memory area ( 1) ~ 1st special symbol starting memory area (4) is remembered as starting memory. Similarly, for the second special symbol game, when four times are held, the information of the second special symbol game corresponding to the changing second special symbol is the second special symbol starting storage area of the main RAM 63 ( 0) is stored as a start memory, and the information of the second special symbol game for four times held is the second special symbol start memory area (1) to the second special symbol start memory area (4) as a start memory. Remembered. Therefore, the total number of winning prizes for both the first special symbol display portion 53 and the second special symbol display portion 54, that is, the first starting opening 32 and the second starting opening 33, is 8 at maximum.

In addition, in place of the first special symbol reservation display unit 55 and the second special symbol reservation display unit 56, or in addition to the first special symbol reservation display unit 55 and the second special symbol reservation display unit 56, in the liquid crystal display device 4 It is also possible to display the suspension of winning in the first starting opening 32 and the suspension of winning in the second starting opening 33.

The round display portion 59 is lit up when the winning symbol is stopped, and indicates the number of rounds as the number of round games (round game) described later when the big hit game state is executed. The round display unit 59 includes three LED lamps 591, 592, 593, and indicates the number of rounds when the jackpot gaming state is executed by turning on or off these LED lamps 591, 592, 593. In the present embodiment, the number of rounds is basically defined as 16 rounds (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as “16R”). In this case, the LED lamp 591 is turned on and the LED lamps 592 and 593 are turned off. To do. The number of rounds (number of times) may mean the total number of times a round game (round game) is executed, or may be an ordinal number indicating the order in which round games are sequentially executed. Regarding the number of rounds, when the former is meant, for example, it is described as “16 rounds” or “16R”, and when the latter is meant, it is described as, for example, “16th round” or “16Rth”. In the following description, the "round game" may be simply referred to as "round".

As shown in FIG. 3, the liquid crystal display device 4 is arranged at the rear of the game board 1, and a display area 4A is arranged substantially in the center thereof so that the player can see it. In addition to the result of the winning lottery based on the winning of the game ball to the mouth 32 and the second starting mouth 33, various images related to the game, for example, identification symbols for production, production images in the normal game state, production in the big hit game state Images, effect images for demonstration display, etc. are displayed. That is, the liquid crystal display device 4 is adapted to perform variable display of the identification information on condition that the game ball has won the first starting opening 32 or the second starting opening 33. In the pachinko gaming machine of the present embodiment, the liquid crystal display device 4 constitutes a display means, and the liquid crystal display device 4, the speakers 10a, 10b and 10c, and the lamp/LED 27 constitute a notification means.

[Electrical structure of gaming machine]
Next, the control circuit of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In FIG. 6, “switch” is abbreviated as “SW” and “solenoid” is abbreviated as “SOL”.

As shown in FIG. 6, the pachinko gaming machine has a main control circuit 60 as a main control means for controlling a game and a sub control circuit 70 as a sub control means for controlling an effect according to the progress of the game. Have.

The main control circuit 60 includes a main CPU 61, a main ROM 62 that is a read-only memory, a main RAM 63 that is a readable/writable memory, an initial reset circuit 64, an I/O port 65, a command output port 66 as a command transmitting unit, and a backup capacitor 67. Is equipped with. The main control circuit 60 is connected to various devices (devices, switches, etc.) including the LED unit 5.

The main CPU 61 is connected to the main ROM 62 and the main RAM 63, and has a function of executing various kinds of processing according to a program stored in the main ROM 62.

To the main control circuit 60, a first starting port switch 320 arranged behind the first starting port 32 is connected. When the game ball is detected by the first starting opening switch 320, a winning lottery is performed.

To the main control circuit 60, a second starting port switch 330 arranged behind the second starting port 33 is connected. When the game ball is detected by the second starting opening switch 330, a winning lottery is performed.

The first starting opening switch 320 and the second starting opening switch 330, if it is detected that the game ball has entered the first starting opening 32 and the second starting opening 33, are determined to have won, and a predetermined detection signal is given. It is supplied to the main control circuit 60.

To the main control circuit 60, a pass gate switch 350 arranged behind the pass gate 35 is connected. When the game ball is detected by the passage gate switch 350, it is determined that the game ball has won the passage gate 35, and a normal symbol lottery is performed. The result of this normal symbol lottery is displayed on the normal symbol display portion 51. When a specific symbol is stopped and displayed in the normal symbol display portion 51, an effect image that makes the player understand that the result of the normal symbol lottery is a win is displayed in the display area 4A of the liquid crystal display device 4. You may do it.

The passage gate switch 350 supplies a predetermined detection signal to the main control circuit 60, assuming that a prize has been won when detecting that the game ball has passed through the passage gate 35. As a result, the passage gate switch 350 gives an opportunity to open the second starting opening 33.

To the main control circuit 60, a general winning opening left switch 400A and a general winning opening right switch 400B arranged behind the general winning openings 40 located on the left and right sides of the game board 1 are connected. When the game balls are detected by the general winning opening left switch 400A and the general winning opening right switch 400B, a predetermined number of prize balls are played by the payout device 83.

The main control circuit 60 is connected to a special winning opening count switch 370 arranged below the special winning opening 37. The special winning opening count switch 370 is for counting the number of winning game balls to the special winning opening 37. When the prize winning of the game ball is detected by the special winning opening count switch 370, the payout device 83 uses the preset number of game balls as the prize balls through the payout opening 20 or the supply opening 21 or the upper plate 17 or the lower plate. The dish 18 is paid out. The special winning opening count switch 370 supplies a predetermined detection signal to the main control circuit 60 when the game ball passes through the special winning opening 37.

The main control circuit 60 controls a special winning opening shutter solenoid 370A for driving the special winning opening shutter 37A for opening and closing the special winning opening 37. As a result, the special winning opening shutter 37A is driven so as to change between an open state in which the gaming ball can be won in the special winning opening 37 and a closed state in which the winning of the gaming ball is impossible or difficult. The opening drive of the special winning opening 37 by such a special winning opening shutter 37A, the special symbol becomes a specific stop display mode in the first special symbol display portion 53 or the second special symbol display portion 54, in the jackpot gaming state. It is done when it is migrated.

The main control circuit 60 controls the blade member solenoid 340 that opens and closes the blade member 34. Thereby, when the normal symbol is stopped and displayed in the predetermined light emitting mode in the normal symbol display portion 51, the blade member 34 is opened for a predetermined time and a predetermined number of times, and the game ball enters the second starting opening 33. It will be easier.

For example, in the normal symbol game of the present embodiment, the probability of hitting the normal symbol in the game state that is not the time saving game state (in the present embodiment, the "non-probability variation/non-time saving game state") is 0/257, and the blade member 34 Will never be released. On the other hand, the probability of hitting a normal symbol in the high probability state (time saving game state) is, for example, 257/257, and when winning, the blade member 34 is opened for a predetermined time and a predetermined number of times. Also, in the normal symbol game, the number of normal symbols to be a winning symbol is one, and the upper limit prize winning number when the second starting opening 33 is opened is 10 counts (10).

The first special symbol hold display unit 55, when the first special symbol display unit 53 or the second special symbol display unit 54 is variably displayed, if a game ball is detected by the first starting opening switch 320, The first special symbol display unit 53 or the second special symbol display unit 54 until the first special symbol or the second special symbol that is being variably displayed is stopped and displayed, the first based on the winning of the game ball into the first starting opening 32. Execution (start) of variable display of special symbols is suspended, that is, the number of suspensions related to the first special symbol is displayed. When the first special symbol or the second special symbol that has been variably displayed is stopped and displayed, the variable display of the first special symbol that has been held as the number of holdings related to the first special symbol is started.

The second special symbol reservation display unit 56, when the game ball is detected by the second starting opening switch 330, when the first special symbol display unit 53 or the second special symbol display unit 54 is variably displayed, 1st special symbol display section 53 or the 2nd special symbol display section 54 until the 1st special symbol or the 2nd special symbol which is being variably displayed is stopped and displayed, the second based on the winning of the game ball to the 2nd starting opening 33 Execution (start) of variable display of special symbols is suspended, that is, the number of suspensions related to the second special symbol is displayed. When the first special symbol or the second special symbol that has been variably displayed is stopped and displayed, the variable display of the second special symbol that has been held as the number of holdings related to the second special symbol is started.

Here, in the pachinko gaming machine of the present embodiment, the priority order of the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is set so that the second special symbol has priority over the first special symbol. .. In addition, according to the winning order to the first starting opening 32 and the second starting opening 33, the corresponding first special symbol and the second special symbol may be variably displayed in the winning order.

In addition, as described above, the upper limit is set for the number of pending executions of variable display of special symbols, and in the present embodiment, the main CPU 61 sets the first starting opening 32 and the second starting opening 33. The maximum number of variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol when the game ball is detected and the game ball is detected by the first starting opening switch 320 and the second starting opening switch 330, respectively, is four at maximum. (I.e., 4 detections) are stored, and the fifth and subsequent ones are not stored as the number of reservations. At this time, when the number of holdings decreases due to the end of the variable display of the special symbols, the number of holdings is again increased up to 4 as an upper limit.

When the holding number of the first special symbol game in the first special symbol display unit 53 is held up to, for example, four, the information of the special symbol game corresponding to the changing first special symbol display unit 53 is the main RAM 63 1 special symbol starting storage area (0) is stored as starting memory, and thereafter, the information of the special symbol game for which the number of holdings is 4 is stored in the first special symbol starting storage areas (1) to (4) of the main RAM 63. Sequentially stored as starting memory.

Similarly, regarding the second special symbol game in the second special symbol display unit 54, when the number of held second special symbol games is held up to, for example, four, it corresponds to the changing second special symbol display unit 54. The information of the 2 special symbol game is stored as a start memory in the second special symbol starting storage area (0) of the main RAM 63, and thereafter, the information of the second special symbol game for which the number of holdings is 4 is the first of the main RAM 63. 2 Special symbol start storage areas (1) to (4) are sequentially stored as start storage.

Therefore, the total number of game balls held in the special symbol game associated with winning the first start opening 32 and the second start opening 33 is a maximum of eight in total, and the first special symbol hold display section 54 and the second special symbol The number of pending displays by the LEDs 551 to 554 and the LEDs 561 to 564 of the pending display unit 55 is four, respectively.

In the opened state of the special winning opening 37 by the special winning opening shutter 37A, the count value by the special winning opening count switch 370 (the winning number of game balls) becomes a predetermined number (in the present embodiment, one winning number), or in advance. It is maintained until either one of the conditions such as the stipulated opening time described later has elapsed. When the number of winning game balls reaches a predetermined number or when the opening time of the special winning opening shutter 37A elapses, the special winning opening shutter 37A is driven to close the big winning opening 37.

In the big hit game state, the open state and the closed state of the big winning opening 37 are repeated based on a preset big winning opening opening/closing pattern (hit pattern) described later. In the big hit game state, a game in which the special winning opening 37 is opened and closed a plurality of times based on a big winning opening opening/closing pattern (hit pattern) described later is referred to as a "round game". The round game (round game) may be simply called a round. For the state from when the special winning opening 37 is closed in one round game to when the special winning opening 37 is opened in the next round game, refer to "inter-round game" or "inter-round interval" or It is also simply called "interval". In addition, in this embodiment, the special winning opening 37 is opened and closed only once in one round, but in another example, the special winning opening 37 is open multiple times in one round. And it may be closed. When a plurality of special winning openings are provided, it is possible to exclusively control the open/closed state of the plurality of special winning openings in one round. That is, in one round, while one big winning opening is repeatedly opened a predetermined number of times, the remaining big winning openings are continuously closed.

The pachinko gaming machine of the present embodiment is provided with a so-called small hit game state as a game state having a property different from the big hit game state. Unlike the big hit game state, the small hit game state is not defined by the concept of a round game, and in the small hit game state of the present embodiment, the special winning opening 37 is defined to be opened only once. .. Of course, in the small hitting game state, an arbitrary or specific big winning opening may be controlled to be repeatedly opened a plurality of times. This small hit game state is a game state that shifts upon winning the small hit by the special symbol lottery. Before and after the transition to the small hitting game state, the game state basically does not change. For example, if a small hit is won in the non-probability variation game state and the game transitions to the small hit game state, the gaming state after the end of this small hit game state remains the non-probability variation game state before the transition to the small hit game state. Therefore, there is no transition to the probability variation game state. Similarly, in the probability variation gaming state, if a small hit is won and the state shifts to the small hitting gaming state, the gaming state after the end of this small hitting gaming state is the small hitting gaming state as long as the number of games in the probability varying gaming state remains. It remains in the probability variation game state before shifting to, and does not shift to the non-probability variation game state.

The round game is counted as the number of rounds (number of times) such as 1 round and 2 rounds. For example, the first round game may be referred to as the first round, and the second round game may be referred to as the second round. In the following description (including the drawings referred to in connection with the description), a “round” with a number such as 1 round or 1st round is simply “R” such as 1R, 2R, 4R, 16R, etc. ] In a round game, when the special winning opening is opened a predetermined number of times, when the specified number of winnings per round is reached before the opening state is reached. In this case, the special winning opening is closed, and the round game is ended without opening the special winning opening for the remaining number of times of opening.

In the display area 4A of the liquid crystal display device 4, an effect image associated with the special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display portion 53 and the second special symbol display portion 54 is displayed. For example, during the variable display of the special symbols displayed on the first special symbol display portion 53 and the second special symbol display portion 54, the display area 4A of the liquid crystal display device 4 is composed of numbers except for a specific case. Designs (decorative designs), for example, numbers such as "0", "1", "2"... "7" are variably displayed in three columns.

On the other hand, when the special symbols that have been variably displayed in the first special symbol display portion 53 and the second special symbol display portion 54 are stopped and displayed, the decorative symbols are also stopped and displayed in the display area 4A of the liquid crystal display device 4.

Further, in the first special symbol display portion 53 and the second special symbol display portion 54, if the changed, stopped special symbol is a specific stop display mode, the player is to grasp that it is a "big hit". The effect image is displayed in the display area 4A of the liquid crystal display device 4.

Specifically, in one of the first special symbol display portion 53 and the second special symbol display portion 54, the special symbol is, for example, in a specific display mode corresponding to a "big hit" that many exits can obtain. When the display is stopped, the combination of the decorative symbols for effect displayed in the display area 4A of the liquid crystal display device 4 is in a specific display mode (for example, a state where all the same symbols are arranged in each of a plurality of symbol columns). The display image for big hit is displayed in the display area 4A of the liquid crystal display device 4.

A specific example of the control of the main CPU 61 described above will be described later.

The main ROM 62 stores a program for causing the main CPU 61 to execute various types of processing described below, and various tables.

The main RAM 63 has a function of storing various data (flags, counters, timers, values of variables, etc.) as a temporary storage area of the main CPU 61. As the temporary storage area of the main CPU 61, another readable/writable storage medium can be used instead of the main RAM 63.

The initial reset circuit 64 generates a reset signal when the power is turned on, and is connected to the main CPU 61.

The I/O port 65 sends input signals from various devices to the main CPU 61 and outputs output signals from the main CPU 61 to various devices.

The command output port 66 transmits various commands from the main CPU 61 to the sub control circuit 70.

The backup capacitor 67 is for holding various data stored in the main RAM 63 by rapidly supplying power to the main RAM 63 when the power is cut off.

Various devices connected to the main control circuit 60 include a special winning opening shutter solenoid 370A, a blade member solenoid 340, and an external terminal board 80.

The external terminal board 80 is connected to a calling device (not shown) having a function of calling a hall staff member and a function of displaying the number of big hits, or an external device such as a hall computer 100 that manages a plurality of pachinko gaming machines installed in the hall. For data communication.

Various switches connected to the main control circuit 60 include a first start opening switch 320, a second start opening switch 330, a passage gate switch 350, a special winning opening count switch 370, a general winning opening left switch 400A, and a general winning opening. The right switch 400B and the backup clear switch 81 are included.

The backup clear switch 81 clears the backup data of the main control circuit 60 and a payout/launch control circuit 82, which will be described later, when the power is cut off or the like according to the operation of the hall manager.

The main control circuit 60 is connected to the launching device 26, the dispensing device 83, and the card unit 84 via the dispensing/launching control circuit 82.

The main control circuit 60 transmits a prize ball control command to the payout/launch control circuit 82. The dispensing/launching control circuit 82 mainly controls the launching device 26 and the dispensing device 83, and is connected to the launching device 26, the dispensing device 83, and the card unit 84. In the pachinko gaming machine of the present embodiment, the payout/launch control circuit 82 and the payout device 83 implement a game value giving means.

The card unit 84 is connected to a ball lending operation panel 85 that outputs a signal requesting the lending of a game ball in accordance with a player's operation, and can send and receive a signal to and from the ball lending operation panel 85. ..

The payout/launch control circuit 82 receives the prize ball control command supplied from the main control circuit 60 and the loan ball control signal supplied from the card unit 84, and transmits a predetermined signal to the payout device 83. Thereby, the payout device 83 is caused to pay out the game ball. The payout device 83 pays out, for example, three gaming balls as the number of prize balls per winning prize to the first starting opening 32 or the second starting opening 33, and as the number of prize balls per winning prize to the general winning opening 40. 10 game balls are paid out, and 15 game balls are paid out as the number of prize balls per winning in the special winning opening 37.

The payout/firing control circuit 82 is a firing solenoid (not shown) according to the amount of rotation when the firing handle 26b of the firing device 26 is gripped by the player and is rotated in the clockwise direction. The electric power is supplied to, and the game ball is controlled to be fired toward the game area 1p.

The main CPU 61 interrupts the main process and executes the timer interrupt process as the interrupt process even during execution of the main process described later. The timer interrupt process is executed with an interrupt condition generated every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms) as a trigger.

The sub control circuit 70 is connected to the main control circuit 60, and is configured so that a command is supplied from the main control circuit 60.

The sub control circuit 70 performs various controls according to various commands supplied from the main control circuit 60, and includes a sub CPU 71, a program ROM 72, a work RAM 73, a command input port 74, a backup capacitor 75, and display control. It has a circuit 76, a voice control circuit 77, a lamp control circuit 78, and a movable effect device control circuit 79. The liquid crystal display device 4 is connected to the display control circuit 76. Speakers 10a, 10b, and 10c are connected to the voice control circuit 77. The lamp/LED 27 is connected to the lamp control circuit 78. The movable effect device control circuit 79 is connected to the movable effect device 42 including a motor and a mechanism for driving the upper movable effect member 42A and the lower movable effect member 42B.

Further, the sub-control circuit 70 is connected to a push-down operation button switch 90A provided on the push-down operation button 9A and is also connected to a jog dial switch 90B provided on the jog dial 9B. The push-down operation button switch 90A detects the operation of the push-down operation button 9A, and the jog dial switch 90B identifies the rotation direction and the rotation angle of the jog dial 9B. To the sub control circuit 70, a push-down operation signal is supplied from the push-down operation button switch 90A and a rotation operation signal is supplied from the jog dial switch 90B.

The sub CPU 71 has a function of executing various kinds of processing according to a program stored in the program ROM 72. The liquid crystal display device 4 functions as a display means. In particular, the sub CPU 71 controls the entire sub control circuit 70 according to various commands supplied from the main control circuit 60.

A specific example of the control of the sub CPU 71 described above will be described later.

The program ROM 72 stores programs and various tables for the sub CPU 71 to mainly control various effects.

The work RAM 73 stores various data (flags, counters, timers, variable values, etc.) as a temporary storage area of the sub CPU 71.

The command input port 74 receives various commands transmitted from the main CPU 61 of the main control circuit 60 and transmits them to the sub CPU 71.

The backup capacitor 75 is for holding various data stored in the work RAM 73 by promptly supplying power to the work RAM 73 when power is cut off.

The display control circuit 76 is for performing display control in the liquid crystal display device 4 according to the data supplied from the sub CPU 71, and for example, an image data processor (VDP) and for generating various image data. The image data ROM stores data, a frame buffer for temporarily storing the image data, and a D/A converter for converting the image data as an image signal. Note that the configuration of the display control circuit 76 is merely an example, and the present invention is not limited to this.

The display control circuit 76 temporarily stores the image data to be displayed in the display area 4A of the liquid crystal display device 4 in the frame buffer according to the image display command supplied from the sub CPU 71. The image data includes, for example, decorative pattern image data, background image data, various effect image data, various fraud notification image data, and the like.

Further, the display control circuit 76 supplies the image data stored in the frame buffer to the D/A converter at a predetermined timing. The D/A converter converts the image data into an image signal and supplies the image signal to the liquid crystal display device 4 at a predetermined timing. An image is displayed in the display area 4A of the liquid crystal display device 4 based on the image signal from the D/A converter.

The voice control circuit 77 is for performing control relating to voices generated from the speakers 10a, 10b, 10c, and for example, a sound source IC for controlling voices, a voice data ROM storing various voice data, a voice signal. It includes an amplifier (AMP) for amplifying. The configuration of the voice control circuit 77 is merely an example, and the configuration is not limited to this.

The sound source IC controls the sound generated from the speakers 10a, 10b, and 10c, and selects one of a plurality of sound data stored in the sound data ROM according to a sound generation command supplied from the sub CPU 71. Voice data can be selected.

Further, the sound source IC reads the selected voice data from the voice data ROM, converts the voice data into a predetermined voice signal, and supplies the voice signal to the amplifier. The amplifier amplifies the audio signal and causes the speakers 10a, 10b, 10c to generate audio.

The lamp control circuit 78 is for controlling the lamps/LEDs 27 including a decorative lamp, a drive circuit for supplying a lamp control signal, a decoration data ROM storing a plurality of types of lamp decoration patterns, and the like. It consists of The configuration of the lamp control circuit 78 is also an example, and the present invention is not limited to this.

The movable effect device control circuit 79 operates (swings) the upper movable effect member 42A and the lower movable effect member 42B by, for example, operating the pressing operation button 9A during the effective period of the operation on the operation unit 9 in the big hit game state. And the like) are controlled.

[Specifications of game machines]
Next, with reference to FIG. 7, specifications regarding game characteristics of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described.

As shown in FIG. 7, in the present embodiment, the jackpot probability of the special symbol to be in the jackpot gaming state is 1/99.75 (657/65536) in the low probability time (non-probability variation gaming state), high probability. At the time (probability variation game state), it is 1/13.05 (5020/65536). The small hit probability of the special symbol which becomes the small hit game state is 1/29.92 (2190/65536) in both the first special symbol and the second special symbol. As for the digestion order of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the lottery by the second special symbol is preferentially digested. As the probability variation performance (specification of probability variation gaming state), the ST gaming state in which the probability variation gaming state continues up to 10 times as the number of games (variation number of special symbols) is implemented.

The distribution of special symbols is as follows. In other words, in the first special symbol big hit symbol "probability variation 1", the big winning opening opening/closing pattern (hit pattern) is the hit pattern 1, and the round number of the round game is 16R (of which the actual number of rounds that can be easily won in the big winning opening is 7R) is given, the bonus name indicating the effect mode in the jackpot gaming state is “normal bonus”, and the bonus content is “7R bonus”. Regarding the "normal bonus", the estimated number of winnings in the first to seventh Rs is one and the number of estimated winnings in the eighth to sixteenth is 0 for the winning in the special winning opening 37. As a result, the number of planned prize balls is 105 in the “normal bonus”. The probability (rush rate) to be "probability variation 1" as a big hit symbol of the first special symbol is set to 100/100. In the present embodiment, the “bonus” means a notification effect related to the number of prize balls.

In the special jackpot pattern "probability variation 1" of the second special symbol, the winning pattern is 2, the number of rounds 16R (the number of actual rounds is also 16R) is given, the bonus name is "Large extra bonus", and the bonus content is "Large extra bonus" It is a "bonus". As for the “large bonus”, the estimated number of winnings of the first to seventh Rs is one and the number of estimated winnings of the eighth to sixteenth is four with respect to the winning in the special winning opening 37. As a result, in the "great addition bonus", the planned number of prize balls is 645. The probability (rush rate) to be "probability variation 1" as a big hit symbol of the second special symbol is set to 35/100.

In the second special symbol big hit symbol "probability variation 2", the hit pattern 3 is given, the number of rounds 16R (the actual number of rounds is also 16R) is given, the bonus name is "medium additional bonus 1", and the bonus content is "medium". The bonus is 1". As for the "middle-up bonus 1", the estimated number of prizes at the first prize to the seventh prize is one and the estimated number of prizes at the eighth prize to the sixth prize is three with respect to the prize to the special winning opening 37. As a result, in the "middle and upper bonus 1", the planned number of prize balls is 510. The probability (rush rate) to be "probability variation 2" as a big hit symbol of the second special symbol is set to 20/100.

In the second special symbol big hit symbol "probability variation 3", it becomes a hit pattern 4 and the number of rounds 16R (the actual number of rounds is also 16R) is given, and the bonus name is "medium additional bonus 2" and the bonus content is "medium". The bonus is 2". The "middle-up bonus 2" is an estimated number of winnings for the first prize to the seventh prize of one for the winning of the special winning opening 37, an estimated number of prizes for the eighth prize and the ninth prize is two, and an estimate of the tenth prize and the 11th prize. The number of winnings is 3, the estimated winning number of the 12th round is 1, and the estimated number of winnings of the 13th to 16th rounds is 4. As a result, in the “middle and upper bonus 2”, the planned number of prize balls is 510. The probability (rush rate) to be "probability variation 3" as the big hit symbol of the second special symbol is set to 10/100.

In the special jackpot pattern "Probability Variation 4" of the second special symbol, the winning pattern is 5, the round number 16R (the actual round number is also 16R) is given, the bonus name is "Small bonus 1", and the bonus content is "Small. The bonus is 1". As for the “small bonus bonus 1”, regarding the winning in the large winning opening 37, the estimated number of winnings in the first to seventh rounds is one, and the estimated number of winnings in the eighth to sixteenth rounds is two. As a result, in the "small addition bonus 1", the planned number of prize balls is 375. The probability (rush rate) to be "probability variation 4" as a big hit symbol of the second special symbol is set to 15/100.

In the big winning symbol "probability variation 5" of the second special symbol, the winning pattern is 6, and the number of rounds 16R (the number of actual rounds is also 16R) is given, the bonus name is "Small bonus 2", and the effect content is "Small. The bonus is 2". As for the “small bonus bonus 2”, with respect to the winning in the large winning opening 37, the estimated number of winnings in the 1R to 13R is one and the estimated number of winnings in the 14R to 16R is four. As a result, in the "small addition bonus 2", the planned number of prize balls is 375. The probability (rush rate) to be "probability change 5" as a big hit symbol of the second special symbol is set to 10/100.

In the special jackpot pattern "probability variation 6" of the second special symbol, the winning pattern is 7, the number of rounds 16R (the number of actual rounds is also 16R) is given, the bonus name is "no additional bonus", and the bonus content is "no additional bonus" It is a "bonus". As for the "no additional bonus", the estimated number of winnings in the 1st to 16th prizes is 1 for winning in the special winning opening 37. As a result, the number of planned prize balls is 240 in the "no additional bonus". The probability (rush rate) to be "probability variation 6" as a big hit symbol of the second special symbol is set to 10/100.

In the small winning symbol design of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the winning pattern is 8, and the bonus name and the bonus content are "small winning symbol". The small hitting pattern rush rate is set to 100/100. Note that, unlike the big hit game state, the small hit game state has no concept of a round game, and thus the number of rounds is not defined.

The special winning hole count number corresponds to the specified winning prize number that triggers the opening of the special winning opening 37 from the open state in one round. In the present embodiment, the special winning hole count number (specified winning number) Is set to "1". That is, when one prize is won in the special winning opening 37 in one round, the special winning opening 37 is changed from the open state to the closed state. It should be noted that the number of special winning openings (regulated number of winnings) does not set the upper limit of the number of winnings in one round. That is, even if, for example, winnings exceeding the number of large winning a prize holes are detected in one round, the number of prize balls corresponding to the number of winnings is paid out. As a result, it is possible to over-win prizes that exceed the number of major prize holes. This point will be described later.

As the time saving performance (specification of time saving game state), the time saving game state is set to continue for a high probability (while in the probability variation game state). The number of prize balls is 3 per winning prize at the starting openings (the first starting opening 32 and the second starting opening 33), and is 10 per winning prize at the general winning entrance 40. It is set to be 15 per winning prize. Normally, the winning probability of the symbol is set to 0/257 when the probability is low and 257/257 when the probability is high. The number of normal symbols is set to one. The number of winning counts when the second starting opening 33 is opened is set to count up to 10 as an upper limit.

The specifications may be as follows. For example, with regard to the special symbols, the jackpot probability at the time of low probability and at the time of high probability is not limited to the above. In other words, the big hit probability of the special symbol may be a probability that the high hit probability is more likely to win the big hit than the low probability hit. The small hit probability is not limited to the above. For example, the specification may be such that the winning probability in one special symbol is higher than that in the other special symbol. Regarding the digestion order of the special symbols, the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be set in the winning order without setting the priority order, or may be the specification of preferentially digesting the first special symbol. The number of STs in which the probability variation gaming state (ST gaming state) continues is not limited to that described above. The probability variation game state may be continued until the next big hit. The number of rounds is not limited to that described above, and a number of rounds other than 16R may be provided. The actual number of rounds may be the same as the number of regular rounds. The types of big hit symbols are not limited to those described above. For example, you may increase the number of types of big hit symbols of the first special symbol. Further, even in the big hit game state based on the first special symbol, the additional bonus may be executed. In the present embodiment, the special winning opening count number (specified winning number) is set to "1", but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the special winning opening count number may be set to 2 or more. In such a case, it is desirable to provide a special winning opening shutter or the like that allows more game balls than the special winning opening count to pass at the same time. The time saving performance may be greater than the number of STs (the number of games in the probability variation game state), or may be less than the number of STs including 0 times. The number of prize balls is not limited to the above. For example, when the number of prize balls related to the special winning opening is set to a value different from the above value, the expected number of prize balls is calculated using the value and the estimated number of prizes, and the number of additional balls to be described later is notified. You can As for the ordinary symbols, the winning probability at the time of low probability and at the time of high probability is not limited to the above. For example, the winning probability of a normal symbol may be a probability that the high probability is easier to win than the low probability, and for example, the low probability may be won. The number of normal symbols is not limited to the above number, and may be two or more, for example. In the case of two or more blades, it is preferable that the opening patterns of the blade members are associated with each other differently. The winning count number of the second starting opening may be a value other than the above.

[1 round open/close pattern]
Next, the opening/closing pattern of the special winning opening in one round will be described with reference to FIG.

As shown in FIG. 8, three types of opening/closing patterns A to C are defined as opening/closing patterns for one round of the special winning opening 37 (opening/closing patterns for one round). The open/close patterns A to C are open/close patterns corresponding to the big hit game state, and the open/close pattern C thereof is the open/close pattern corresponding to the small hit game state. The opening/closing pattern C in the small hitting game state is not defined as one round, but is shown as an opening/closing pattern for one round for convenience. The open/close patterns A to C shown in FIG. 8 are merely examples, and the number of types thereof, the specific time for defining the open/close pattern, and the like may be other than those shown.

The open/close pattern A is an open/close pattern in which the open state continues for 10 seconds. In the opening/closing pattern A, a period from the first open state to the final closed state is defined as a round section. Similarly, in the other opening/closing patterns B and C, the round section is defined as a period from the first opening state to the final closing state. In the section where the open state is 10 s, the open state of the special winning opening 37 is a relatively long open state. That is, the opening/closing pattern A has one long opening, and the opening time of the opening/closing pattern A is 10 s.

The open/close pattern B is an open/close pattern in which the open state continues for 5 seconds. In the opening/closing pattern B, the period from the first opening to the final closing is defined as a round section. In the section where the open state is 5 s, the open state of the special winning opening 37 is a middle open which is shorter than a long open. That is, the opening/closing pattern B is one in which the middle opening occurs, and the opening time of the opening/closing pattern B is 5 s.

The open/close pattern C is an open/close pattern in which the open state is 0.1 s. The section in which the open state is 0.1 s is a short open that is considerably shorter than the middle open. That is, the opening/closing pattern C is one in which a short circuit is opened only once, and the opening time of the opening/closing pattern C is 0.1 s.

The actual round game in the big hit game state is a round game when the opening and closing control is performed based on the opening and closing patterns A and B of the above-described opening and closing patterns A to C including the long opening or middle opening that allows winning of the game ball. Applicable The round game when the opening/closing is controlled based on the opening/closing pattern C is a non-substantial round game that does not correspond to the substantive round game.

The opening/closing pattern for one round may have the following contents. The opening patterns are not limited to the above three types, and may be two types or less or four types or more. For the opening/closing pattern A, the opening time may be, for example, less than 10 s or more than 10 s instead of 10 s, as long as a predetermined number of game balls can be won. Further, instead of opening only once in one round, it may be opened plural times. For the opening/closing pattern B, the opening time may be, for example, less than 5 s or more than 5 s instead of 5 s, as long as a predetermined number of game balls can be won. Further, instead of opening only once in one round, it may be opened plural times. Further, the opening/closing pattern A and the opening/closing pattern B may have the same opening time, or the opening/closing pattern B may have a longer opening time than the opening/closing pattern A. For the opening/closing pattern C, the opening time may be, for example, less than 0.1 s or more than 0.1 s instead of 0.1 s. Further, instead of opening only once in one round, it may be opened plural times.

[Prize winning opening/closing pattern (hit pattern) and interval between rounds]
Next, with reference to FIG. 9, a big winning opening opening/closing pattern (hit pattern) and an interval between rounds in the big hit game state and the small hit game state will be described.

As shown in FIG. 9, as the special winning opening opening/closing pattern (hit pattern), a plurality of hit patterns 1 to 8 are defined. The winning pattern 1 is the number of rounds that occurs during the normal bonus and is defined as the number of open rounds (hereinafter referred to as the “regular number of rounds”), and the long opening or middle that allows winning into the special winning opening 37. The actual round number defined only for the rounds including at least the opening is the hit pattern defined as 7R. In addition, the interval between rounds starts immediately after the game ball of the specified winning number (1) is detected by the special winning opening count switch 370 in one round, and it is a big winning until it is first opened in the next round. It corresponds to a section in which the mouth 37 is closed. The inter-round interval may be started immediately after the special winning opening 37 is completely closed in one round. As shown in the figure, as the inter-round interval pattern, an interval pattern a having a closed time (closing time) of 0.3 s, an interval pattern b of 1.65 s, and an interval pattern of 2.31 s. The interval pattern d is set to be c and 2.97 s. In the winning pattern 1, all the intervals between rounds are the interval pattern a, and the big winning opening 37 becomes the opening/closing pattern A in the 1st to 7th rounds, and the big winning opening 37 becomes in the 8th to 16th rounds. It is regulated that the opening/closing pattern C is set. That is, the hit pattern 1 defines that the substantial rounds are the seven rounds of the first to seventh rounds, and the remaining nine rounds of the eighth to sixteenth rounds are executed as the non-substantial rounds.

The hit pattern 2 is a hit pattern that occurs when a large bonus is added and the specified round number and the actual round number are defined as 16R. In the hit pattern 2, the interval between rounds from the end of the 1st R to the start of the 7th R is the interval pattern a, and the interval between rounds from the end of the 7R to the start of the 16th R is interval pattern d. It is specified that the special winning opening 37 has an opening/closing pattern B in all rounds. In the large addition bonus that is executed as an effect together with the hit pattern 2, the number of prize balls based on only the number of special winning openings (regular prize number: 1) is 240, but when the over-winning is included, the planned number of prize balls is Since it becomes 645, the number (405) corresponding to these differences is notified as the number to be added in the first half round (rounds 1R to 7R).

The hit pattern 3 is a hit pattern that occurs at the time of the middle-up bonus 1, and the specified round number and the actual round number are defined as 16R. In the hit pattern 3, the inter-round interval from the end of the 1st R to the start of the 7R is the interval pattern a, and the inter-round interval from the end of the 7R to the start of the 16th R is interval pattern c. It is specified that the special winning opening 37 has an opening/closing pattern B in all rounds. In the medium addition bonus 1 which is executed as an effect together with the hit pattern 3, the number of prize balls based on the specified number of prizes is 240, but the expected number of prize balls is 510 including over prizes. The number (270) to be added is notified as the number to be added in the first half round.

The hit pattern 4 is a hit pattern that occurs at the time of the middle-up bonus 2, and the specified round number and the actual round number are defined as 16R. In the hit pattern 4, the inter-round interval from the end of the 1st R to the start of the 7th R is the interval pattern a, the interval between the rounds from the end of the 7R to the start of the 9R is interval pattern b, the end of the 9R to the start of the 11th R The interval between rounds is interval pattern c, the interval between rounds between 11R and 12R is interval pattern a, the interval between rounds after the end of 12R to the start of 16R is interval pattern d, and 1R to 16R In all rounds, the special winning opening 37 is defined to be the opening/closing pattern B. In the medium addition bonus 2 which is executed as an effect together with the hit pattern 4, the number (270) corresponding to the difference between the number of prize balls (240) and the planned number of prize balls (510) is the second half round (rounds 8R and later). Will be notified as an additional number.

The hit pattern 5 is a hit pattern that occurs at the time of the small additional bonus 1 and the specified round number and the actual round number are defined as 16R. In the hit pattern 5, the inter-round interval from the end of the 1st R to the start of the 7th R is the interval pattern a, and the inter-round interval from the end of the 7R to the start of the 16th R is interval pattern b. It is specified that the special winning opening 37 has an opening/closing pattern B in all rounds. In the small addition bonus 1 which is executed as an effect together with the hit pattern 5, the number of prize balls based on the specified number of prizes is 240, but when the over prize is included, the planned number of prize balls is 375. The number to do (135) is notified as an additional number in the first half round.

The hit pattern 6 is a hit pattern that occurs at the time of the small additional bonus 2, and the specified round number and the actual round number are defined as 16R. In the hit pattern 6, the inter-round interval from the end of the 1st R to the start of the 13th R is an interval pattern a, and the interval between rounds from the end of the 13R to the start of the 16th R is an interval pattern d. It is specified that the special winning opening 37 has an opening/closing pattern B in all rounds. In the small additional bonus 2 which is executed as an effect together with the hit pattern 6, a number (135) corresponding to the difference between the number of prize balls (240) and the planned number of prize balls (375) is notified as an additional number until the second half round. ..

The hit pattern 7 is a hit pattern that occurs when the bonus is not added and the specified round number and the actual round number are defined as 16R. In the hit pattern 7, all round intervals from the end of the 1st R to the start of the 16th R are the interval pattern a, and the special winning opening 37 is the opening/closing pattern B in all the rounds of the 1R to 16R. Has been done. In the no-add-on bonus that is executed as an effect together with the winning pattern 7, there is no difference between the number of prize balls (240) and the planned number of prize balls (240) because over-winning is unlikely to occur, and the number of additional balls is notified. Absent.

The hit pattern 8 is defined to occur during the small hit game state, and the special winning opening 37 becomes the opening/closing pattern C only once. That is, the hit pattern 8 is executed as a hit pattern in which the winning probability of the game ball to the special winning opening 37 is extremely low.

The winning pattern may have the following contents. In the present embodiment, as will be described later, the time between rounds is defined as the interval patterns a to d as described above on the assumption that the game balls are continuously fired. The time of the inter-round interval may be defined based on the time point at which the firing operation is started. For example, in the present embodiment, when a plurality of game balls are successively fired by the start of the firing operation, for example, the second game ball can reach the special winning opening shutter 37A from the time when the firing operation is started. The estimated maximum arrival time of the second wax is 3.99 s (3.33 s+0.66 s). Similarly, the third assumed maximum arrival time is 4.65s (3.33s+0.66s+0.66s), and the fourth assumed maximum arrival time is 5.31s (3.33s+0.66s+0.66s+0.66s), 5 The assumed maximum arrival time of the item is 5.97 s (3.33 s+0.66+0.66 s+0.66 s+0.66 s). Thereby, as the interval pattern b, a time corresponding to such a second expected maximum arrival time may be defined. That is, the interval patterns a to d may be times other than the above-mentioned times, but it is preferable that the interval pattern a be a time less than the second assumed maximum arrival time, and the interval pattern b is the third assumed maximum. The time is preferably less than the arrival time, the interval pattern c is preferably less than the fourth expected maximum arrival time, and the interval pattern d is less than the fifth expected maximum arrival time. It is preferable that In the present embodiment, the interval pattern d, which is the maximum time between rounds, is defined as the time at which four winnings per round (three over winnings) can be realized. It may be a time when a prize can be won. However, when 5 or more winnings are possible, it is preferable that the longitudinal direction dimension of the special winning opening shutter 37A is set to a length that allows at least 5 game balls to pass simultaneously. The hit pattern 1 may be the same opening/closing pattern assigned to all of the rounds, or the opening/closing pattern may be different only in some rounds. Furthermore, the hit pattern 1 may have different interval patterns only for some of the inter-round intervals. The hit patterns 2 to 7 may have different open/close patterns in some or all rounds. Further, the hit patterns 2 to 7 may have different interval patterns only for some of the inter-round intervals.

[Specification of big winning opening shutter]
Next, the specifications of the special winning opening shutter 37A will be described with reference to FIG. Note that, in FIG. 10, the positional relationship between the special winning opening shutter 37A (the special winning opening 37) and the special winning opening count switch 370 is schematically illustrated as being different from FIG. 3 and the like for convenience.

As shown in FIG. 10A, the special winning opening shutter 37A is movable in the front-rear direction of the game board 1 (not shown) (the direction indicated by the white arrow in the drawing). The special winning opening shutter 37A has a longitudinal dimension L of about d×8+a (6 mm)=94 mm when the diameter d of the game ball is 11 mm, for example. As a result, a maximum of eight game balls can simultaneously pass on the upper surface of the special winning opening shutter 37A in the closed state. However, in the present embodiment, in response to the start of the firing operation, one game ball is fired until the next one game ball is fired, or one game ball is fired. As shown in FIG. 10B, by considering the arrival time from when the game ball is located at the right end portion of the special winning opening shutter 37A (the upper area of the right end portion of the closed special winning opening shutter 37A) In addition, a maximum of four game balls can be assumed to pass at the same time. It should be noted that the time until the gaming ball that has reached the right end portion of the special winning opening shutter 37A is detected by the special winning opening count switch 370 (the time until the inter-round interval starts) is about 0.1 s. Further, the time required for the special winning opening shutter 37A to move from one of the positions where the special winning opening 37 is closed and where it is open to the other is about 0.01 s. Is.

That is, in the present embodiment, the firing device 26 has a firing rate of 90.90 per minute and a firing interval of 0.66 seconds. In addition, the game ball generally reaches from 3.00 to 3.30 as a time from the launch preparation position (not shown) to the right end portion of the special winning opening shutter 37A through the first guide rail 30 and the second guide rail 30'. It takes 33 seconds. As a result, in a state where the player continues to hit the ball to the right, one game ball reaches the right end portion of the special winning opening shutter 37A, and then, approximately 0.33 to 0.99 seconds later, the next game ball receives a large winning prize. The right end portion of the mouth shutter 37A is reached. Further, the special winning opening shutter 37A has a longitudinal dimension L of 94 mm, and a maximum of eight game balls having a diameter d=11 mm can pass through in a row at the same time, but the upper surface thereof has a game ball of 0. Since it is an inclined surface that advances by 11 mm in 33 seconds, that is, advances by 22 mm every 0.66 seconds, practically a maximum of four game balls can pass at the same time. Then, the interval between rounds is started from the time when the winning of one gaming ball is detected during the round game, and is started immediately before the special winning opening shutter 37A completely closes the special winning opening 37. In addition, immediately after the game ball reaches the right end portion of the special winning opening shutter 37A, the special winning opening shutter 37A is opened, and from that time until the winning of the game ball is detected by the special winning opening count switch 370, , 0.1 second is required. Furthermore, it is assumed that 0.01 seconds are required for one opening/closing operation in which the special winning opening shutter 37A moves from the closed position to the open position or from the open position to the closed position.

In the present embodiment, by assuming the various times as described above, in the state where the right hit is continuously performed in the big hit game state, the time between the rounds after the end of the first round is the interval. If the pattern d is 2.97 s, it is possible to win four prizes including three over prizes per round. Regarding the time of such an interval pattern d, for example, after the game ball detected as a winning prize at the 1R reaches the right end portion of the special winning opening shutter 37A, a maximum of 0.99 seconds later the next gaming ball is a big winning opening. From the point of reaching the right end portion of the shutter 37A, the time during which four game balls including this game ball will be located on the upper surface of the special winning opening shutter 37A is approximately 0.99s+0.66s×3( It is proved from the fact that it becomes 2.97 s. In addition, if the time between rounds after the end of the 1st round is 2.31 s of the interval pattern c, it is possible to win three prizes including two over prizes per round. This can be assumed as a state in which the number of over-winning prizes has decreased from three to over-winning prizes. Thereby, regarding the time of the interval pattern c, about the time when the three game balls will be located on the upper surface of the special winning opening shutter 37A, 2.97 s of the interval pattern d corresponding to the above three over-winning. It is considered that one passage time is subtracted from this, and it is proved from the fact that 2.97s−0.66s=2.31s. Similarly, if the time between rounds after the end of the 1st R is 1.65 s of the interval pattern b, it is possible to win two prizes including one over prize per round. This can be assumed as a state where the number of over-winning prizes is reduced to one over-winning prize. As a result, regarding the time of the interval pattern b, regarding the time during which the two game balls will be located on the upper surface of the special winning opening shutter 37A, 2.31 s of the interval pattern c corresponding to the above two over-winnings. It is considered that one passage time is subtracted from this, and it is proved from the fact that 2.31s−0.66s=1.65s. Furthermore, if the time between rounds after the end of the first round is 0.3 s of the interval pattern a, there is no over-winning per round, and only one can be won. Regarding the time of such an interval pattern a, for example, after the game ball detected as a winning prize at the 1R reaches the right end portion of the special winning opening shutter 37A, the next gaming ball is a big winning opening 0.33 seconds after the shortest. Since it reaches the right end portion of the shutter 37A, it is proved from the fact that the next game ball is in an open state before reaching the right end portion of the special winning opening shutter 37A in 0.3s shorter than such 0.33 seconds. It

[Various tables]
Next, various tables referred to by the sub CPU 71 will be described with reference to FIGS. It should be noted that the table defines lottery value (random number) information for determining predetermined items based on a lottery value (random number) extracted (lottery) from a predetermined random number range. The value information is synonymous with the so-called lottery rate. The lottery value information (lottery rate) can be changed as appropriate. In the following description, the “random number value” may be simply referred to as “random number”. 11 and 13, the selection rate (%) corresponding to the lottery rate is shown.

[Additional pattern selection table]
FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an additional pattern selection table. The additional pattern selection table is a table referred to in a hit effect pattern determination process (see FIG. 36) of the sub CPU 71 described later. The additional pattern selection table is a table for selecting an additional pattern as a hit effect pattern, which will be described later, according to the hit patterns 2 to 7. The additional pattern selection table is provided for each of the winning patterns 2 to 7, and defines various additional patterns to be determined and a selection rate (%) when selecting the additional pattern by lottery.

According to the additional pattern selection table (hit pattern 2) associated with the winning pattern 2, the large additional patterns 1 to 4 are selected at a predetermined selection rate as the additional patterns corresponding to the large bonus. According to the addition pattern selection table (hit pattern 3) associated with the hit pattern 3, the middle addition patterns 1 to 4 are selected at a predetermined selection rate as the additional patterns corresponding to the middle addition bonus 1. According to the addition pattern selection table (hit pattern 4) associated with the hit pattern 4, the middle addition patterns 5 to 8 are selected at a predetermined selection rate as the additional patterns corresponding to the middle addition bonus 2. According to the additional pattern selection table associated with the winning pattern 5 (hit pattern 5), the small additional patterns 1 to 4 are selected at a predetermined selection rate as the additional patterns corresponding to the small additional bonus 1. According to the additional pattern selection table (hit pattern 6) associated with the winning pattern 6, the small additional patterns 5 to 8 are selected as the additional patterns corresponding to the small additional bonus 2 at a predetermined selection rate. According to the addition pattern selection table (hit pattern 7) associated with the hit pattern 7, the no addition pattern 1 is selected at a predetermined selection rate (100% in the present embodiment) as the addition pattern corresponding to the no addition bonus. To be done.

The selection rate for allocating the additional pattern, which is a decision item in the additional pattern selection table, is not limited to that shown in FIG. 11. Each of the additional pattern selection tables other than the additional pattern selection table (hit pattern 7) defines four additional patterns, but may specify three or less or five or more additional patterns, and each additional pattern selection table. The number of patterns defined for each may be different. Also in the additional pattern selection table (pattern 7), a plurality of additional patterns may be defined.

[Additional pattern table]
FIG. 12 is a diagram showing an additional pattern table. This additional pattern table is a table referred to in the during-round effect process (see FIG. 37) of the sub CPU 71, which will be described later. The additional pattern table is a table for defining the number of additional effects for performance and the round in which the notification is performed according to the additional pattern. The additional pattern table is provided for each type of bonus, and defines the additional pattern and the number of rounds which are reference items, and the additional number which is a decision item. It should be noted that the number of additional characters is notified when the additional character described later appears.

According to the additional pattern table (large additional bonus) corresponding to the large additional bonus, the number of rounds and the additional number to be notified are defined for each of the large additional patterns 1 to 4 as the additional pattern. For example, in the large addition pattern 1, "30" is notified as the addition number at the 2R, "105" is notified as the addition number at the 4R, and "270" is notified as the addition number at the 7R. The total number of additions is “405”.

According to the add-on pattern table corresponding to the add-on middle 1 (add-on bonus 1), the number of rounds and the add-on number to be notified are defined for each of the add-on patterns 1 to 4 as add-on patterns. For example, in the medium addition pattern 1, “30” is notified as the addition number at the 2R, “105” is notified as the addition number at the 4R, and “135” is notified as the addition number at the 7R. The total number of additions is “270”.

According to the add-on pattern table corresponding to the add-on bonus 2 (add-on bonus 2), the number of rounds and the add-on number to be notified are defined for each of the add-on patterns 5 to 8 as add-on patterns. For example, in the medium-addition pattern 5, "135" is notified as the addition number at the 8R, and "135" is notified as the addition number at the 9R. The total number of additions is “270”.

According to the small addition pattern table corresponding to the small addition bonus 1 (small addition bonus 1), the number of rounds and the added number to be notified are defined for each of the small addition patterns 1 to 4 as the addition pattern. For example, in the small additional pattern 1, "30" is reported as the additional number at the 2R and "105" is reported as the additional number at the 4R. The total number of additions is “135”.

According to the small addition pattern table corresponding to the small addition bonus 2 (small addition bonus 2), the round number and the added number to be notified are defined for each of the small addition patterns 5 to 8 as the addition pattern. For example, in the small addition pattern 5, “135” is notified as the addition number only to the 8th R.

According to the add-on pattern table corresponding to the no-add-on bonus (no-add-on bonus), the number of rounds according to the no-add-on pattern 1 as the add-on pattern and the added number to be notified are defined. For example, in the no-addition pattern 1, the number of additions is not notified in any round.

Note that the numerical values for allocating the additional numbers in the additional pattern table are not limited to those shown in FIG. 12, and the additional numbers (405, 270, 135) obtained from the difference between the number of prize balls and the planned number of prize balls may be appropriately allocated. You can do this. In addition, after a numerical value that exceeds the total number of additions is notified as an additional number, by setting a numerical value to be notified so as to be subtracted, the final total number of additions may be set. .. Further, for example, “210” may be defined as the initial value so that the notification of the number of additions is always generated in any round.

[Additional character lottery table]
FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an additional character lottery table. The additional character lottery table is a table referred to in a hit effect pattern determination process (see FIG. 36) of the sub CPU 71 described later. The additional character lottery table is a table for selecting an additional character to be made to appear at the time of starting the additional bonus or informing the number of additional characters according to the additional pattern by lottery. The additional character lottery table defines various additional patterns that are reference items, additional characters that are decisions, and selection rates (%) when selecting additional characters by lottery. As the characters to be added, "animal", "female", and "fireworks" are defined.

For example, in the large addition patterns 1 to 4, the selection ratio of the “female” addition character is higher than that of the “animal” addition character, and the selection ratio of the “fireworks” addition character is higher than that of the “female” addition character. Is specified to be high. In the middle-up patterns 1 to 8, it is generally defined that the selection rate of the “female” or “fireworks” additional character is higher than that of the “animal” additional character. In the small addition patterns 1 to 8, it is generally defined that the selection rate of the "animal" additional character is higher than that of the "female" or "fireworker" additional character. In the non-adding-up pattern 1, it is specified that the selection rate of the adding-up character of "animal" is the highest. According to the additional character that appears based on such an additional character lottery table, the type of bonus is suggested, and the expectation for the prize ball is also increased from the additional number that is notified at the same time when the additional character appears. be able to.

The selection rate for allocating the additional characters in the additional character lottery table is not limited to that shown in FIG. For various types of additional characters, additional patterns that cannot be selected may be defined. For example, it is assumed that the additional character of "animal" cannot be selected only in the large additional pattern, the additional character of "female" cannot be selected only in the no additional pattern, and the additional character of "fireworks" is Alternatively, the selection rate may be defined so that the pattern can be selected only in the medium and large addition patterns.

[Control by main CPU]
Next, the processing executed by the main CPU 61 will be described below with reference to FIGS.

[Main processing by main CPU]
14 and 15 are flowcharts showing the main processing executed by the main CPU 61. This main process is executed in the following steps. As shown in FIG. 14, in S10, the main CPU 61 performs a watchdog timer disable setting process. When this process ends, the process moves to S11.

In S11, the main CPU 61 performs input/output port setting processing. When this process ends, the process moves to S12.

In S12, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether or not the power failure is detected. In this processing, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not the power failure detection signal is HIGH (high level). If the power failure detection signal is not HIGH, it is determined that the power failure is in the power failure detection state, and the process proceeds to S12. If the power failure detection signal is HIGH, it is determined that the power failure is not detected and the process is performed in S13. Transfer.

In S13, the main CPU 61 performs a sub-control reception acceptance wait process. In this process, the main CPU 61 performs a process of waiting until the sub control circuit 70 receives a signal. When this process ends, the process moves to S14.

In S14, the main CPU 61 performs a process of permitting writing to the main RAM 63. When this process ends, the process moves to S15.

In S15, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether the backup clear switch 81 (see FIG. 6) is ON. In this process, the main CPU 61 shifts the process to S30 (see FIG. 15) when it is determined that the backup clear switch 81 is ON, and proceeds to S16 when it is determined that the backup clear switch 81 is not ON. Transfer processing.

In S16, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether or not there is a power failure detection flag. In this processing, the main CPU 61 shifts the processing to S17 when determining that there is the power failure detection flag, and shifts the processing to S30 (see FIG. 15) when determining that the power failure detection flag does not exist. ..

In S17, the main CPU 61 performs a work area damage check and a process of calculating a work damage check value. When this process ends, the process moves to S18.

In S18, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether the work damage check value is a normal value. In this processing, the main CPU 61 shifts the processing to S19 when it is determined that the work damage check value is a normal value, and shifts the processing to S30 when it is determined that the work damage check value is not a normal value. ..

In S19, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting 7FFEH in the stack pointer. When this process ends, the process moves to S20.

In S20, the main CPU 61 performs an initial setting process of the work area at power recovery. When this process ends, the process moves to S21.

In S21, the main CPU 61 performs a probability change state display notification setting process at power recovery. Specifically, in the case of the probability variation gaming state, the main CPU 61 causes a display for informing that the winning probability of the big hit is a high probability state. When this process ends, the process moves to S22. It should be noted that the notification display may be configured to end at the first fluctuation start or fluctuation end after the power is turned on.

In S22, the main CPU 61 performs a process of transmitting a power recovery command. In this process, the main CPU 61 performs a process of transmitting to the sub control circuit 70 a command for returning to the game state at the time of power interruption. When this process ends, the process moves to S23.

In S23, the main CPU 61 initializes the devices around the main CPU 61. When this process ends, the process moves to S24 and returns to the address before the power failure, that is, the program address indicated by the program counter restored from the stack area.

As shown in FIG. 15, in S30, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting the stack pointer to 8000H. When this process ends, the process moves to S31.

In S31, the main CPU 61 performs a process of acquiring an initial value of a random number related to the hit determination. When this process ends, the process moves to S32.

In S32, the main CPU 61 performs an all work area clear process. When this process ends, the process moves to S33.

In S33, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting an initial value of a random number related to the hit determination. When this process ends, the process moves to S34.

In S34, the main CPU 61 performs a process of initializing the work area when the RAM is initialized. When this process ends, the process moves to S35.

In S35, the main CPU 61 performs a process of transmitting a command for initializing the main RAM 63 to the sub control circuit 70. Further, in the sub control circuit 70, the main CPU 61 is initialized based on the received command. When this process ends, the process moves to S36.

In S36, the main CPU 61 initializes the devices around the main CPU 61. When this process ends, the process moves to S37.

In S37, the main CPU 61 executes an interrupt prohibition process. In this process, the main CPU 61 performs a process of prohibiting the interrupt process. When this process ends, the process moves to S38.

In S38, the main CPU 61 performs an initial value random number updating process. In this process, the main CPU 61 performs a process of updating the initial random number counter value. When this process ends, the process moves to S39.

In S39, the main CPU 61 performs an interrupt permission process. In this process, the main CPU 61 performs a process of permitting the interrupt process. When this process ends, the process moves to S40.

In S40, the main CPU 61 performs a process of updating the effect condition selection random number. In this processing, the main CPU 61 performs processing for updating the effect random number counter value. When this process ends, the process moves to S41.

In S41, the main CPU 61 determines whether the system timer monitoring timer value is 3 or more. In this processing, the main CPU 61 refers to the system timer monitoring timer value stored in the main RAM 63, and when the system timer monitoring timer value is 3 or more, moves the processing to S42 and sets the system timer monitoring timer value to 3 If not, the process proceeds to S37.

In S42, the main CPU 61 performs a process of subtracting 3 from the value of the system timer monitoring timer stored in the main RAM 63. When this process ends, the process moves to S43.

In S43, the main CPU 61 performs a timer update process. In this process, the main CPU 61 measures the waiting time timer for synchronizing the main control circuit 60 and the sub control circuit 70, and the opening time of the special winning opening 37 which is opened when a big hit or a small hit occurs. Special winning opening time timer, a security signal output timer for measuring the minimum output period of the security signal output from the main CPU 61 to the hall computer 100 via the external terminal board 80 when it is detected that there has been a misconduct Etc., etc. are executed to update various timers. When this process ends, the process moves to S44.

In S44, the main CPU 61 performs a special symbol control process. As will be described later in detail, in this process, the main CPU 61 performs a special symbol control process. The main CPU 61 extracts a hit determination random value and a hit symbol determination random value according to the detection signals from the first start winning opening switch 320 and the second starting winning opening switch 330, and stores them in the main ROM 62. The jackpot determination table (not shown) is referred to, it is determined whether or not the special symbol lottery (lottery for the jackpot and the jackpot) is won, and the result of the determination is stored in the main RAM 63. The special symbol control process of S44 will be described later with reference to FIG. When this process ends, the process moves to S45.

In S45, the main CPU 61 performs normal symbol control processing. In this process, the main CPU 61, in accordance with the detection signal from the pass gate switch 350, extracts the normal symbol determination random number value and the normal symbol determination random number value, and stores the extracted normal symbol determination random number value and the main ROM 62. Based on the normal symbol winning table (not shown), it is determined whether or not the regular symbol lottery is won, and the result of this determination, the normal symbol determining random number value, and the normal symbol determining table stored in the main ROM 62. Based on (not shown), it is determined which of the lost symbol and the hit symbol is to be performed, and the process of storing the determination result is performed. In the case of winning the normal symbol lottery, the result of the determination showing the winning symbol is stored, and in the case of the non-winning, the result of the determination showing the lost symbol is stored. When the result of the determination showing the hit pattern is stored, the blade member 34 is opened three times in 1.3 seconds, or four times in 1.4 seconds, or six times in 1.8 seconds. .. That is, when the normal symbol lottery is won, the blade member 34 is designed to be opened, and when the blade member 34 is in the opened state, the game ball is likely to enter the second starting opening 33. When this process ends, the process moves to S46.

In S46, the main CPU 61 performs a symbol display device control process. In this process, the main CPU 61 sends to the main RAM 63 a control signal for driving the LED unit 5 according to the result of the special symbol control process stored in the main RAM 63 in S44 and S45, and the result of the normal symbol control process. Perform the process of storing. The main CPU 61 transmits the control signal to the LED unit 5. The LED unit 5 variably displays and stops the first special symbol or the second special symbol on the first special symbol display portion 53 or the second special symbol display portion 54 based on the received control signal. Further, the normal symbol display portion 51 of the LED unit 5 displays the normal symbol in a variable display and a stop display based on the received control signal. When this process ends, the process moves to S47.

In S47, the main CPU 61 performs a game information data generation process. In this process, the main CPU 61 performs a process of generating data relating to a game information signal to be transmitted to the base computer or the hall computer 100 and storing it in the main RAM 63. When this process ends, the process moves to S48.

In S48, the main CPU 61 performs a symbol reserve number data generation process. In this process, the main CPU 61 detects the special symbol-related switch check process and the normal symbol-related switch check process (S71, S72 in FIG. 17) in the timer interrupt process, which will be described later. Based on the detection signal from the starting opening switch 330 and the passage gate switch 350 and the update result of the number-of-holds data stored in the main RAM 63 that is updated according to the execution of the variable display of the special symbol and the normal symbol, the first A process of storing a control signal for driving the special symbol hold display unit 55, the second special symbol hold display unit 56 and the normal symbol hold display unit 52 in the main RAM 63 is performed. When this process ends, the process moves to S49.

In S49, the main CPU 61 performs port output processing. In this process, the main CPU 61 performs a process of outputting the control signal stored in the main RAM 63 from each port in the above steps and the like. Specifically, the main CPU 61 outputs a security signal to the hall computer 100 via the external terminal board 80 and an LED power source (common signal) for lighting the LED, opening/closing the special winning opening shutter 37A, and opening/closing the blade member 34. It supplies solenoid power for driving the solenoid that opens and closes. When this process ends, the process moves to S50.

In S50, the main CPU 61 executes a winning opening-related command control process. In this process, the main CPU 61 performs a process of controlling a winning opening-related command. When this process ends, the process moves to S37.

In the pachinko gaming machine of this embodiment, the main processing by the main CPU 61 in S38 to S50 constitutes the gaming processing.

[Timer interrupt processing by the main CPU 61]
FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing the timer interrupt processing executed by the main CPU 61. This timer interrupt process is executed in the following steps. The main CPU 61 may interrupt the main processing and execute the timer interrupt processing even when the main processing is being executed. This timer interrupt process is a process performed in response to a clock pulse generated at a predetermined cycle (for example, 2 ms) from a clock pulse generation circuit (not shown). In the pachinko gaming machine of the present embodiment, the timer interrupt processing by the main CPU 61 constitutes the interrupt processing.

As shown in FIG. 16, in S60, the main CPU 61 performs a register saving process. In this process, the main CPU 61 performs a process of saving the register. When this process ends, the process moves to S61.

In S61, the main CPU 61 performs a timer update process. As will be described later in detail, in this process, the main CPU 61 performs a process of incrementing the value of the system timer monitoring timer stored in the main RAM 63 by +1. The system timer monitor timer is a monitor timer for executing a predetermined process (special symbol control process or the like) on condition that the timer interrupt process is started a predetermined number of times (three times). When this process ends, the process moves to S62.

In S62, the main CPU 61 performs processing for setting clear data in the watchdog output data. In this process, the main CPU 61 sets clear data in the watchdog output data and sends a control signal based on the watchdog output data to the initial reset circuit 64. The initial reset circuit 64 releases the voltage of the capacitor based on the received control signal. It should be noted that when a predetermined time (for example, 3100 ms) determined by the capacitance of the capacitor connected to the initial reset circuit 64 elapses after the watchdog timer provided in the initial reset circuit 64 is cleared, the main CPU 61 is reset from the initial reset circuit 64. A system reset signal is output to. When the system reset signal is input from the initial reset circuit 64, the main CPU 61 enters the system reset state. When this process ends, the process moves to S63.

In S63, the main CPU 61 performs a random number update process. In this process, the main CPU 61 performs a process of updating the random number. For example, the main CPU 61 updates random numbers such as a hit determination random number counter, a hit symbol determination random number counter, a normal symbol determination random number counter, and an effect condition determination random number counter. If the update timing of the counter value is indefinite, the hit determination random number counter and the hit symbol determination random number counter will lack fairness, so to ensure this, the fixed timing every 2 ms. I am trying to update it. When this process ends, the process moves to S64.

In S64, the main CPU 61 performs a switch input process. As will be described later in detail, in this processing, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not each switch corresponding to each passage area or the like has detected a winning. For example, when a winning is detected, the main CPU 61 sets “1 (ON)” to the bit corresponding to the passage area determined to have been winning. The switch input process of S64 will be described later with reference to FIG. When this process ends, the process moves to S65.

In S65, the main CPU 61 performs payout control processing. In this processing, the main CPU 61 checks whether or not a game ball has won in the special winning opening 37, the first starting opening 32, the second starting opening 33, and the general winning opening 40, and if there is a winning, respectively. And sends a payout request command corresponding to the above to the payout/launch control circuit 82. That is, the main CPU 61 sets a command for paying out the prize ball corresponding to the passing area in which the bit is “1 (ON)” from the payout device 83 in association with the winning of the game ball, and the set command. Is transmitted to the payout/launch control circuit 82. Also, when this command is set, the bit corresponding to the passage area that triggered the command setting is controlled to “0 (OFF)”. When this process ends, the process moves to S66.

In S66, the main CPU 61 executes a command transmission control process. In this process, the main CPU 61 transmits each set command to the command input port 74 of the sub control circuit 70 through the command output port 66. When this process ends, the process moves to S67.

In S67, the main CPU 61 performs a register restoration process. In this process, the main CPU 61 performs a process of restoring the register to the address before the interrupt process. When this processing ends, this timer interrupt processing routine ends.

[Switch input processing]
FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing the switch input process executed by the main CPU 61. This switch input process is executed in the following steps. As shown in FIG. 17, in S70, the main CPU 61 performs fraud detection switch check processing. In this process, the main CPU 61 checks the detection state of a radio wave sensor (not shown) that can detect radio waves, a magnetic sensor that can detect magnetism, a vibration sensor that can detect vibration, and the like. When this process ends, the process moves to S71. If any of the above-mentioned sensors is in a detected state, error notification may be given, and at that time, even if the special winning opening count switch detects a winning of a game ball, the winning is invalid. You may do so.

In S71, the main CPU 61 conducts special symbol-related switch check processing. This special symbol related switch check processing will be described later with reference to FIG. When this process ends, the process moves to S72.

In S72, the main CPU 61 performs normal symbol related switch check processing. In this process, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not the passage gate switch 350 has been input, in other words, whether or not a game ball has been detected, and if it is determined that the input has been made, the number of reserves is the upper limit (for example, (4 pieces), and if it is determined to be the upper limit, this processing ends. When it is determined that it is not the upper limit, the random number for hit determination is extracted from the random number counter for normal determination of the normal symbol game, the random number value for random determination is extracted from the random number counter for random determination, and the normal RAM 63 Processing for storing in the symbol storage area is performed. When this process ends, the process moves to S73.

In S73, the main CPU 61 conducts prize ball-related switch check processing. In this process, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether or not there is an input from the general winning opening left switch 400A, the general winning opening right switch 400B, the first starting winning opening switch 320, and the second starting winning opening switch 330. When it is determined that the general winning opening left switch 400A or the general winning opening right switch 400B is input, a process of adding 1 to the value of the general winning opening prize ball counter is performed, and the first starting winning opening switch 320 or the second When it is determined that the start winning opening switch 330 has been input, a process of adding 1 to the value of the corresponding starting opening winning counter is performed. When this process ends, this switch input process routine ends.

[Special symbol related switch check processing]
FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing a special symbol-related switch check process executed by the main CPU 61. This special symbol related switch check process is executed in the following steps. As shown in FIG. 18, in S80, the main CPU 61 performs a first starting opening switch check process. This processing will be described later with reference to FIG. When this process ends, the process moves to S81.

In S81, the main CPU 61 performs a second starting opening switch check process. This processing will be described later with reference to FIG. When this process ends, the process moves to S82.

In S82, the main CPU 61 performs a special winning opening switch check process. This processing will be described later with reference to FIG. When this process ends, this special symbol related switch check process routine ends.

[First start opening switch check process]
FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing the first starting opening switch check processing executed by the main CPU 61. This first starting opening switch check processing is executed in the following steps. As shown in FIG. 19, in S90, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether or not the winning of the game ball into the first starting opening 32 is detected based on the detection signal from the first starting opening switch 320. To do. In this process, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not the bit of the first start opening winning detection counter corresponding to the detection signal from the first start opening switch 320 is “1 (ON)”, and the first start opening is determined. If the bit of the winning detection counter is "1 (ON)", the process proceeds to S91. If the bit of the winning detection counter is not "1 (ON)", the first starting port The switch check processing routine ends.

In S91, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether or not the number of starting memories of the first special symbol is 4 or more. In this process, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not the number of starting memories of the first special symbol, that is, the number of holdings is 4 or more. When it is determined that the number of holdings is 4 or more, the first starting opening switch check processing routine is ended, and when it is determined that the number of holdings is not 4 or more, the process proceeds to S92.

In S92, the main CPU 61 performs a process of adding "1" to the number of starting memories of the first special symbol. In this process, the main CPU 61 performs a process of adding “1” to the value of the number of reserved first special symbols stored in the main RAM 63. When this process ends, the process moves to S93.

In S93, the main CPU 61 performs various random number value acquisition processing. In this process, the main CPU 61 extracts the hit determination random number value of the special symbol game from the hit determination random number counter by so-called special symbol lottery, and further extracts the hit symbol determination random number value from the hit symbol determination random number counter. A process of extracting a random number value for effect condition determination from the random number counter for effect condition determination and storing it in the first special symbol starting storage area of the main RAM 63 is performed.

In the present embodiment, the first special symbol starting storage area is from the first special symbol starting storage area (0) to the first special symbol starting storage area (4), and is stored in the first special symbol starting storage area (0). The determination result based on the hit determination random number is derived and displayed by the first special symbol, various obtained by the game ball winning the first starting opening 32 during the change of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. The random number value is sequentially stored in the first special symbol starting storage area (1) to the first special symbol starting storage area (4) as starting memory. When this process ends, the process moves to S94.

In S94, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting the first special symbol variation state data. In this process, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting the first special symbol variation state data in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63. When this process ends, the process moves to S95.

In S95, the main CPU 61 performs a winning effect determination process. In this process, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not to perform the winning effect based on the random number lottery. When this process ends, the process moves to S96.

In S96, the main CPU 61 sets a start winning command in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63. This start winning command includes information indicating a random number for winning determination and information indicating a random number for determining a winning symbol. The start winning command is supplied from the main CPU 61 of the main control circuit 60 to the sub CPU 71 of the sub control circuit 70, so that the sub control circuit 70 recognizes that a game ball has been won and whether or not a winning lottery result has been won. Like The data of the start winning command includes data for executing a winning effect, for example, an effect of changing the display mode of the reserved ball displayed as an effect when it is determined in the process of S95 that the winning effect is achieved. As a result, a so-called "pre-reading effect", such as performing an effect based on the starting memory before the variation execution, becomes possible. When this process ends, the first starting opening switch check process routine ends.

[Second starting opening switch check process]
FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing the second starting opening switch check processing executed by the main CPU 61. The second starting opening switch check process is executed in the following steps. As shown in FIG. 20, in S100, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether or not the winning of the game ball into the second starting opening 33 is detected based on the detection signal from the second starting opening switch 330. To do. In this processing, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not the bit of the second starting opening winning detection counter corresponding to the detection signal from the second starting opening switch 330 is “1 (ON)”, and the second starting opening is determined. If the bit of the winning detection counter is "1 (ON)", the process proceeds to S101. If the bit of the winning detection counter is not "1 (ON)", the second starting port The switch check processing routine ends.

In S101, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether or not the number of starting memories of the second special symbol is 4 or more. In this process, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not the number of starting memories of the second special symbol, that is, the number of holdings is 4 or more. If it is determined that the number of holdings is 4 or more, the second starting opening switch check processing routine is ended, and if it is determined that the number of holdings is not 4 or more, the process proceeds to S102.

In S102, the main CPU 61 performs a process of adding "1" to the number of starting memories of the second special symbol. In this process, the main CPU 61 performs a process of adding "1" to the value of the number of reserved second special symbols stored in the main RAM 63. When this process ends, the process moves to S103.

In S103, the main CPU 61 performs various random number value acquisition processing. In this process, the main CPU 61 extracts the random number value for hit determination of the special symbol game from the random number counter for determination of hit by so-called special symbol lottery, and further extracts the random number value for symbol determination from the random number counter for determination of hit symbol. A process for extracting the effect condition determination random number value from the effect condition determination random number counter and storing it in the second special symbol starting storage area of the main RAM 63 is performed.

In the present embodiment, the second special symbol starting storage area, the second special symbol starting storage area (0) to the second special symbol starting storage area (4), and stored in the second special symbol starting storage area (0) The determination result based on the hit determination random number is derived and displayed by the second special symbol, various obtained by the game ball winning the second starting opening 33 during the change of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. The random number value is sequentially stored in the second special symbol starting storage area (1) to the second special symbol starting storage area (4) as starting memory. When this process ends, the process moves to S104.

In S104, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting the second special symbol variation state data. In this process, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting the second special symbol variation state data in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63. When this process ends, the process moves to S105.

In S105, the main CPU 61 performs a winning effect determination process. In this process, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not to perform the winning effect based on the random number lottery. When this process ends, the process moves to S106.

In S106, the main CPU 61 sets a start winning command in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63. The start winning command is as described above. When this process ends, the second starting opening switch check process routine ends.

[Winning prize switch check processing]
FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing the special winning opening switch check processing executed by the main CPU 61. The special winning opening switch check process is executed in the following steps. As shown in FIG. 21, in S110, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether or not a winning of a game ball to the special winning opening 37 is detected based on a detection signal from the special winning opening count switch 370. .. In this process, when the main CPU 61 determines that the winning of the game ball to the special winning opening 37 is detected, the main CPU 61 shifts the processing to S111, and determines that the winning of the game ball to the special winning opening 37 is not detected. In this case, the special winning opening switch check processing routine ends.

In S111, the main CPU 61 performs a process of adding 1 to the value of the special winning opening winning counter. The special winning opening winning counter is a counter for determining whether or not the number of winning game balls detected in one round has reached a prescribed number of winning prizes. When this process ends, the process moves to S112.

In S112, the main CPU 61 sets a special winning opening winning command in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63. The special winning opening winning command is supplied from the main CPU 61 of the main control circuit 60 to the sub CPU 71 of the sub controlling circuit 70 so that the sub controlling circuit 70 recognizes the winning of the game ball into the special winning opening 37. Become. On the condition that such a special winning opening winning command is received, the sub control circuit 70 adds, for example, the additional number displayed during the additional bonus to the planned prize ball number described later. When this process ends, the special winning opening switch check process routine ends.

[Special symbol control processing]
FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing a special symbol control process executed by the main CPU 61. This special symbol control process is executed in the following steps. Note that, in FIG. 22, the numerical values on the sides of S121 to S128 indicate control status flags corresponding to those steps, and are stored in the storage area of the control status flag in the main RAM 63. The main CPU 61 executes one step corresponding to the numerical value of the control state flag stored in the main RAM 63. As a result, the special symbol game proceeds.

As shown in FIG. 22, in the first S120, the main CPU 61 executes a process of loading a control state flag. In this process, the main CPU 61 reads the control state flag from the main RAM 63. When this process ends, the process moves to S121.

In S121 to S128, which will be described later, the main CPU 61 determines whether to execute various processes in each step based on the value of the control state flag. This control state flag indicates the state of the game of the special symbol game, and enables any of the processes in S121 to S128 to be executed. In addition to that, the main CPU 61 executes the process in each step at a predetermined timing determined according to a waiting time timer set for each step. Before reaching the predetermined timing, the main CPU 61 ends without executing the processing in each step, and executes another subroutine. The main CPU 61 also executes a timer interrupt process at a predetermined cycle.

In S121, the main CPU 61 executes a special symbol storage check process. The details of S121 will be described later with reference to FIG. When this process ends, the process moves to S122.

In S122, the main CPU 61 executes a special symbol variation time management process. In this process, the main CPU 61, the control state flag is a value (01H) indicating the special symbol variation time management, when the variation time has elapsed, the control state flag a value (02H) indicating the special symbol display time management After setting, the waiting time after confirmation (for example, 600 ms) is set in the waiting time timer. That is, it is set to execute the processing of S123 after the waiting time after confirmation has elapsed. The details of S122 will be described later with reference to FIG. When this process ends, the process moves to S123.

In S123, the main CPU 61 executes a special symbol display time management process. In this process, the main CPU 61 determines whether the big hit or the small hit is reached when the control state flag is a value (02H) indicating the special symbol display time management, and the waiting time after confirmation elapses. In the case of a big hit or a small hit, the main CPU 61 sets the value (03H) indicating the hit start interval management in the control state flag, and sets the time corresponding to the hit start interval in the waiting time timer. That is, the processing of S124 is set to be executed after the time corresponding to the hit start interval has elapsed. On the other hand, the main CPU 61 sets a value (07H) indicating the end of the special symbol game when it is not a big hit or a small hit. That is, it is set to execute the process of S128. The details of S123 will be described later with reference to FIG. When this process ends, the process moves to S124.

In S124, the main CPU 61 executes a hit start interval management process. In this process, the main CPU 61 determines that the control state flag is a value (03H) indicating the hit start interval management, and when the time corresponding to the hit start interval has elapsed, the special winning opening shutter read from the main ROM 62. Data for opening 37A is stored in the main RAM 63. Then, in the process of S49 of FIG. 15, the main CPU 61 reads out the data for opening the special winning opening shutter 37A stored in the main RAM 63, and outputs a signal to open the special winning opening shutter 37A. The special winning opening shutter solenoid 370A is supplied. As a result, the main CPU 61 controls the opening and closing of the special winning opening 37. That is, a winning game state is executed in which a predetermined advantageous game (a round game in which the special winning opening 37 changes to an open state in which it is easy to accept a game ball and a closed state in which it is difficult to accept it) is executed a predetermined number of times. Become. In this case, the small winning game state in which the special winning opening 37 is opened only once may be executed.

Further, the main CPU 61 sets a value (04H) indicating that the special winning opening is being opened in a control state flag, and sets an opening upper limit time (for example, 10s of opening/closing pattern A per round) as a special winning opening opening time timer. set. That is, it is set to execute the process of S126. The details of S124 will be described later with reference to FIG. When this process ends, the process moves to S165.

In S125, the main CPU 61 executes a special winning opening pre-reopening waiting time management process. In this processing, the main CPU 61 determines that the control state flag is the value (05H) indicating the waiting time before opening the special winning opening and the time corresponding to the inter-round interval (interval pattern a to d) has elapsed, The special winning opening opening counter is stored and updated so as to be incremented by "1". The main CPU 61 sets the control state flag to a value (04H) indicating that the special winning opening is open. The main CPU 61 sets the opening upper limit time (for example, 10 s of the opening/closing pattern A per round) in the special winning opening opening time timer. That is, it is set to execute the process of S126. The details of S125 will be described later with reference to FIG. When this process ends, the process moves to S126.

In S126, the main CPU 61 executes a special winning opening opening process. In this process, when the control state flag is a value (04H) indicating that the special winning opening is open, the condition that the special winning opening winning counter is “1” or more, and the opening upper limit time has passed ( It is determined whether or not any of the conditions that the special winning opening opening time timer is "0") is satisfied. The main CPU 61 updates the variable positioned in the main RAM 63 in order to close the special winning opening 37 when either condition is satisfied. Then, it is determined whether or not the condition that the special winning opening opening number counter is equal to or larger than the maximum winning opening opening maximum value (the final round) is satisfied. The main CPU 61 sets the value (06H) indicating the hit end interval in the control state flag in the case of the final round, while the value (05H) indicating the waiting time management before the special winning opening reopening in the case of not the final round. To the control status flag. The details of S126 will be described later with reference to FIG. When this process ends, the process moves to S127.

In S127, the main CPU 61 executes a hit end interval management process. In this process, the main CPU 61 controls the value (07H) indicating the special symbol game end when the control state flag is the value (06H) indicating the hit end interval and the time corresponding to the hit end interval has elapsed. Set to flag. That is, it is set to execute the process of S128. The details of S127 will be described later with reference to FIG. When this process ends, the process moves to S128.

In S128, the main CPU 61 executes a special symbol game ending process. In this process, the main CPU 61 sets the value (00H) indicating the special symbol storage check when the control state flag is the value (07H) indicating the end of the special symbol game. That is, it is set to execute the process of S121. The details of S128 will be described later with reference to FIG. When this process ends, the special symbol control process routine ends.

As described above, the special symbol game is executed by setting the control state flag. Specifically, in the case where the main CPU 61 is not in the big hit game state or the small hit game state, the main CPU 61 sets the control state flags to (00H), (01H), (02H when the result of the hit determination is lost. ) And (07H) in this order, the processing of S121, S122, S123, and S128 shown in FIG. 22 is executed at a predetermined timing. When the main CPU 61 is not in the big hit game state or the small hit game state, the main CPU 61 sets the control state flags to (00H), (01H), (02H when the result of the hit determination is the big hit or the small hit. 22) is sequentially set, the processing of S121, S122, and S123 shown in FIG. 22 is executed at a predetermined timing, and control to the big hit game state or the small hit game state is executed. Further, when the control to the big hit game state or the small hit game state is executed, the main CPU 61 sets the control state flags in the order of (03H), (04H), (05H), so that FIG. The processing of S124, S126, and S125 shown is executed at a predetermined timing to execute the big hit game state or the small hit game state. In addition, when the ending condition of the big hit game state or the small hit game state is satisfied, by setting (04H), (06H), (07H) in order, the processing of S125, S127 to S128 shown in FIG. 21 is performed. It is executed at a predetermined timing, and the big hit game state or the small hit game state is ended.

[Special symbol memory check processing]
FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing a special symbol storage check process executed by the main CPU 61. This special symbol storage check process is executed in the following steps.

As shown in FIG. 23, in S130, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not the control state flag is the value (00H) indicating the special symbol storage check. When the main CPU 61 determines that the control state flag is the value indicating the special symbol storage check, the main CPU 61 shifts the processing to S131. On the other hand, when determining that the control state flag is not the value (00H) indicating the special symbol storage check, the main CPU 61 ends this special symbol storage check processing routine.

In S131, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether or not the start memory is stored. In this process, the main CPU 61, when it is determined that there is no start memory of the special symbol game, that is, the first special symbol start storage area (0) to the first special symbol start storage area (4) or the second special symbol start storage When the data is not stored in the area (0) to the second special symbol starting storage area (4), the processing is moved to S132. On the other hand, when the main CPU 61 determines that there is a start memory, it shifts the processing to S133.

In S132, the main CPU 61 performs demo display processing. In this process, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting a demo display permission value in the main RAM 63. Further, the starting memory of the special symbol game (the first special symbol starting storage region or the second special symbol starting storage region in which the random number for hit determination is stored) has a state of "0" for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds). If maintained, the demo display permission value is set to a value that permits execution of the demo display. Then, the main CPU 61 carries out a process of setting a demo display command when the demo display permission value is a predetermined value. The demo display command thus stored is supplied from the main CPU 61 of the main control circuit 60 to the sub CPU 71 of the sub control circuit 70 as a demo display command. As a result, the demo display is executed in the display area 4A of the liquid crystal display device 4. When this process ends, the special symbol storage check process routine ends.

In S133, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether or not the starting memory corresponding to the second special symbol is "0". In this process, the main CPU 61 determines the presence or absence of data in the second special symbol starting storage area (0) to the second special symbol starting storage area (4), and the starting storage corresponding to the second special symbol is "0". That is, that is, when it is determined that the data is not stored in the second special symbol starting storage area (0) to the second special symbol starting storage area (4), the process is moved to S134. Starting memory corresponding to the second special symbol is not "0", that is, if it is determined that the data is stored in the second special symbol starting memory region (0) to the second special symbol starting memory region (4), S135. Transfer processing to.

In S134, the main CPU 61 executes a process of setting a value (02H) indicating the fluctuation of the second special symbol as a fluctuation state number in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63. When this process ends, the process moves to S136.

In S135, the main CPU 61 executes a process of setting a value (01H) indicating the fluctuation of the first special symbol as a fluctuation state number in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63. When this process ends, the process moves to S136.

In S136, the main CPU 61 executes a process of setting a value (01H) indicating special symbol variation time management as a control state flag. When this process ends, the process moves to S137.

In S137, the main CPU 61 executes a special symbol memory transfer process. In this process, the main CPU 61, when the special symbol to be variably displayed is the first special symbol, each of the data of the first special symbol starting storage area (1) to the first special symbol starting storage area (4), the first The special symbol starting storage area (0) shifts (stores) from the first special symbol starting storage area (3) to the processing, and the special symbol to be variably displayed is the second special symbol, the second special symbol starting storage area (1) from each of the data in the second special symbol starting storage area (4), the processing to shift (store) from the second special symbol starting storage area (0) to the second special symbol starting storage area (3) To do. When this process ends, the process moves to S138.

In S138, the main CPU 61 executes a big hit determination process. In this process, the main CPU 61 selects one jackpot from a plurality of jackpot determination tables (not shown) in which the number of determination values (jack determination values) that are jackpots is different depending on whether or not the gaming state flag indicates the probability variation gaming state. Select the judgment table. That is, when the gaming state flag is a value indicating the probability variation gaming state, the jackpot determination table for high probability with a large number of jackpot determination values is referred to, and when the gaming state flag is not a value indicating the probability variation gaming state, the jackpot determination value The jackpot determination table for the non-probability variation game state with a small number is referred to. In this way, if the gaming state flag is a value indicating the probability variation gaming state, that is, if the gaming state is the probability variation gaming state as a special gaming state that is easy to shift to the specific gaming state (big jackpot gaming state), the jackpot gaming state is set. The probability of transition is higher than the non-probability variation game state as the non-special game state in which it is more difficult to transition to the specific game state than the probability variation game state as the special game state.

The special game state is a probability variation/time saving game state, and the non-special game state is basically a non-probability variation/non-time saving game state, but the special game state is at least one of a probability variation game state and a time saving game state. It may be one of the gaming states. The non-special game state may include a non-probability-varied game state and a case of a time saving game state.

Then, the main CPU 61 is for the hit determination of the special symbol starting storage area that is extracted at the time of winning the game ball and is previously set in the first special symbol starting storage area (0) and the second special symbol starting storage area (0). Reference the random number value and the selected jackpot determination table. Then, the main CPU 61 determines that it is a big hit when the random number for hit determination and the big hit determination value match. That is, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not to make a jackpot gaming state advantageous to the player.

Thus, in the process of S138, either a big hit or a loss is determined as a result of the special symbol game. When this process ends, the process moves to S139.

In S139, the main CPU 61 executes the small hit determination process when it is determined in the big hit determination process of S138 that the big hit is not won. In this processing, the main CPU 61 selects a small hit determination table that defines a small hit determination value (small hit determination value) regardless of the gaming state flag.

Then, the main CPU 61 is extracted at the time of winning the game ball, and is a random number value for determining the special symbol starting storage area set in the first special symbol starting storage area (0) or the second special symbol starting storage area (0). And the selected small hit determination table. Then, the main CPU 61 determines that it is a small hit when the random number for hit determination and the small hit determination value match.

In addition, since the small hit can occur in both the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the random determination for randomness stored in the first special symbol starting memory area (0) or the second special symbol starting memory area The small hit determination process is performed based on the numerical value, but the small hit determination process may be performed based on only the random number value for hit determination stored in one of the special symbol starting storage areas.

In this way, in the process of S139, a small symbol or a loss is determined as a result of the special symbol game, and if both the big hit determination process of S138 and the small hit determination process of S139 have not been won, the special symbol. Loss will be determined as the result of the game determination. When this process ends, the process moves to S140.

In S140, the main CPU 61 executes a special symbol determination process. In this process, the main CPU 61 determines a big hit symbol when the result of the big hit determination is a big hit, and determines a small hit symbol when the result of the small hit determination is a small hit. If it is also lost, the process for determining the lost symbol is performed. The details of S140 will be described later with reference to FIG. When this process ends, the process moves to S141.

In S141, the main CPU 61 executes a special symbol variation pattern determination process. In this process, the main CPU 61 differs based on the special symbol determined in the process of S140, the results of the big hit determination and the small hit determination determined in the processes of S138 and S139, and the value of the probability variation counter. A fluctuation pattern determination table for determining a fluctuation pattern is selected. Then, the main CPU 61 determines a variation pattern based on the effect condition determination random number extracted from the effect condition determination random number counter and the selected variation pattern determination table, and stores the variation pattern in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63. Here, the ST game state and the normal game state each have a different variation pattern determination table. The main CPU 61 determines the variable display mode of the special symbol on the first special symbol display section 53 or the second special symbol display section 54 based on the data indicated by such a variation pattern. It should be noted that this process is the same even during the ST gaming state.

The data indicating the variation pattern thus stored is supplied to the first special symbol display portion 53 or the second special symbol display portion 54 of the LED unit 5. As a result, the first special symbol display portion 53 or the second special symbol display portion 54 will be variably displayed in the variation pattern determined by the special symbol. The data indicating the variation pattern stored in this way is supplied from the main CPU 61 of the main control circuit 60 to the sub CPU 71 of the sub control circuit 70 as a variation pattern designation command. The sub CPU 71 of the sub control circuit 70 executes the effect display according to the received variation pattern designation command. When this process ends, the process moves to S142.

In S142, the main CPU 61 performs a special symbol variation time setting process. In this processing, the main CPU 61 sets a fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern of the determined special symbol in the waiting time timer, and executes processing for clearing the storage area used for the fluctuation display this time. When this process ends, the process moves to S143.

Then, in S143, the main CPU 61 executes processing for clearing the value of the storage area (0) used for the variable display this time. When this process ends, the special symbol storage check process routine ends.

[Special symbol determination process]
FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing a special symbol determination process executed by the main CPU 61. This special symbol determination process is executed in the following steps.

As shown in FIG. 24, in S150, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not it is a big hit. In this process, if the main CPU 61 determines that it is a big hit, it shifts the process to S151. On the other hand, when the main CPU 61 determines that it is not a big hit, the main CPU 61 shifts the processing to S156.

In S151, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not the jackpot variation state number determined in S150 is a value (01H) indicating that the variation is the first special symbol. In this processing, the main CPU 61 shifts the processing to S152 when the fluctuation state number is a value (01H) indicating that the fluctuation is the first special symbol. On the other hand, the main CPU 61, if the variation state number is not a value (01H) indicating that it is a variation of the first special symbol, that is, the variation state number is a value (02H) indicating that it is a variation of the second special symbol. In this case, the processing is moved to S154.

In S152, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining a big-hit symbol of the first special symbol, based on the random number value for winning symbol determination. In this process, the main CPU 61, based on the winning symbol determination random number and the jackpot determination table extracted from the jackpot symbol determining counter, the jackpot symbol of the first special symbol (shown in the first special symbol jackpot symbol allocation of FIG. 7) The process which determines whether it is a symbol corresponding to probability variation 1) is performed. When this process ends, the process moves to S153.

In S153, the main CPU 61 performs the data set of the jackpot symbol of the determined first special symbol and the command set of the jackpot symbol. In this process, the main CPU 61 sets the big hit symbol data in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63 and supplies it to the first special symbol display portion 53. The first special symbol display unit 53 variably displays the first special symbol, and stops and displays it in a mode based on the data of the big hit symbol of the first special symbol. Further, the main CPU 61 sets the command of the big hit symbol of the first special symbol in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63, and supplies it from the main CPU 61 to the sub CPU 71 of the sub control circuit 70 as a special symbol designation command. By the control of the sub-control circuit 70, the identification symbol (decorative symbol) is derived and displayed in the display area 4A of the liquid crystal display device 4 in the big hit stop display mode. When this process ends, the process moves to S159.

In S154, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining a big hit symbol of the second special symbol. In this process, the main CPU 61, based on the winning symbol determination random number extracted from the jackpot symbol determination counter and the jackpot determination table, the jackpot symbol of the second special symbol (shown in the second special symbol jackpot symbol allocation of FIG. 7) A process of determining which of Probability Variation 1 to Probability Variation 6) is a pattern is performed. When this process ends, the process moves to S155.

In S155, the main CPU 61 performs a data set of the jackpot pattern of the determined second special symbol and a command set of the jackpot symbol. In this process, the main CPU 61 sets the big hit symbol data in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63 and supplies it to the second special symbol display portion 54. The second special symbol display unit 54 variably displays the second special symbol, and stops and displays it in a mode based on the data of the big hit symbol of the second special symbol. Further, the main CPU 61 sets the command of the big hit symbol of the second special symbol in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63, and supplies it from the main CPU 61 to the sub CPU 71 of the sub control circuit 70 as a special symbol designation command. By the control of the sub-control circuit 70, the identification symbol (decorative symbol) is derived and displayed in the display area 4A of the liquid crystal display device 4 in the big hit stop display mode. When this process ends, the process moves to S159.

In S156, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not the result of the small hit determination process (S139 in FIG. 23) is a small hit. In this process, the main CPU 61 shifts the process to S157 if the small hit is won. On the other hand, the main CPU 61 shifts the processing to S161 when the small hit is not won.

In S157, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining a small hit symbol of the second special symbol. In this process, the main CPU 61, based on the winning symbol determination random number extracted from the big hit symbol determination counter and the small hit determination table, the first special symbol or the second special symbol small hit symbol (first in FIG. 7). The second special symbol small hit pattern is a small hit pattern shown in the symbol distribution) process is performed to determine whether or not. When this process ends, the process moves to S158.

In S158, the main CPU 61 performs data set and command set of the small hit symbol of the determined first special symbol or the small special symbol of the second special symbol. In this process, the main CPU 61 sets the data of the small hit symbol in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63 and supplies it to the first special symbol display section 53 or the second special symbol display section 54. The first special symbol display unit 53 or the second special symbol display unit 54 variably displays the special symbols and stops and displays them in a mode based on the data of the big hit symbols. Further, the main CPU 61 sets the command of the small winning symbol of the first special symbol or the second special symbol in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63, and supplies it from the main CPU 61 to the sub CPU 71 of the sub control circuit 70 as a special symbol designation command. .. By the control of the sub-control circuit 70, the identification symbol (decorative symbol) is derived and displayed in the display area 4A of the liquid crystal display device 4 in the small hit stop display mode. When this process ends, the process moves to S159.

In S159, the main CPU 61 performs a hit start interval display time data set process corresponding to the hit symbol. In this process, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting hit start interval display time data corresponding to the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol in the main RAM 63. When this process ends, the process moves to S160.

In S160, the main CPU 61 performs a special winning opening opening number related data set process. In this process, the main CPU 61, in the special winning opening number of times related data regarding the number of times the special winning opening 37 is opened, namely, probability variation 1 by the first special symbol or probability variation 1 to 6 by the second special symbol, or a small hit symbol. The corresponding data is set in the main RAM 63. When this process ends, this special symbol determination process routine ends.

On the other hand, in S161, the main CPU 61 performs neither a big hit in S150 nor a small hit in S156, that is, when it is determined that the game is a loss, a data set of a lost symbol and a command set of a lost symbol are performed. In this processing, the main CPU 61 sets the data of the lost symbol in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63 and supplies it to the first special symbol display section 53 or the second special symbol display section 54. The first special symbol display unit 53 or the second special symbol display unit 54 variably displays the special symbol, and causes the special symbol to be stopped and displayed in a mode based on the data of the lost symbol. Further, the main CPU 61 sets the command of the lost symbol in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63, and supplies it from the main CPU 61 of the main control circuit 60 to the sub CPU 71 of the sub control circuit 70 as a special symbol designation command. By the control of the sub-control circuit 70, the identification symbol (decorative symbol) is derived and displayed in the display area 4A of the liquid crystal display device 4 in the loss stop display mode. When this process ends, this special symbol determination process routine ends.

[Special symbol variable time management processing]
FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing a special symbol variation time management process executed by the main CPU 61. This special symbol variation time management process is executed in the following steps.

As shown in FIG. 25, in S170, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not the control state flag is a value indicating the special symbol fluctuation time management (value set in the special symbol storage check process: 01H). When determining that the value is the value (01H) indicating the special symbol variation time management, the main CPU 61 shifts the processing to S171. On the other hand, if the main CPU 61 determines that it is not the value (01H) indicating the special symbol variation time management, it ends the special symbol variation time management processing routine.

In S171, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not the waiting time timer set in the special symbol storage check process is “0”. When determining that the waiting time timer is “0”, the main CPU 61 shifts the processing to S172. When it is determined that the waiting time timer is not "0", the special symbol variation time management processing routine is ended.

In S172, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting (storing) a value (02H) indicating the special symbol display time management in the special symbol control state flag, and moves the process to S173. At this time, the main CPU 61 recognizes the symbol stop in the symbol display device control process, and derives the display result with the symbol determined by the special symbol determination process.

In S173, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting a symbol stop command. In this process, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting (storing) the symbol stop command in the main RAM 63. Then, the symbol stop command is supplied from the main CPU 61 of the main control circuit 60 to the sub CPU 71 of the sub control circuit 70 as a symbol stop command, so that the sub control circuit 70 recognizes the symbol stop. When this process ends, the process moves to S174.

In S174, the main CPU 61 performs processing for setting the post-determination wait time in the area of the main RAM 63 that functions as the wait time timer. In the present embodiment, if the symbol to be stopped and displayed is a big hit symbol or a small hit symbol, for example, 1002 ms is set as the wait time after confirmation, and if it is a lost symbol, for example, 540 ms is set as the wait time after confirmation. .. It should be noted that the same waiting time after confirmation may be used in both cases of the winning symbol and the losing symbol, or the waiting time after confirmation may be longer in the losing symbol than in the case of the winning symbol. When this process ends, the special symbol variation time management process routine ends.

[Special symbol display time management process]
FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing a special symbol display time management process executed by the main CPU 61. This special symbol display time management process is executed in the following steps.

As shown in FIG. 26, in S180, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether or not the control state flag is a value (02H) indicating the special symbol display time management process. When determining that the control state flag is the value (02H) indicating the special symbol display time management process, the main CPU 61 shifts the process to S181. On the other hand, when determining that the control state flag is not the value (02H) indicating the special symbol display time management process, the main CPU 61 ends the special symbol display time management process routine.

In S181, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not the value of the waiting time timer corresponding to the special symbol display management process is "0". When the value of the waiting time timer is “0”, the main CPU 61 shifts the processing to S182. On the other hand, when the value of the waiting time timer is not “0”, the main CPU 61 ends the special symbol display time management processing routine.

In S182, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether or not it is a big hit. When the main CPU 61 determines that it is a big hit, the main CPU 61 shifts the processing to S183. On the other hand, if the main CPU 61 determines that it is not a big hit, it shifts the processing to S184.

In S183, the main CPU 61 performs processing for clearing the game state flag. That is, the main CPU 61 executes a process of setting a value (00H) indicating the normal game state (inaccurate change/non-time saving) in the game state flag. When this process ends, the process moves to S190.

In S184, the main CPU 61 determines whether the value of the probability variation counter is "0". The probability variation number counter is a counter for counting the number of remaining games in the probability variation game state (number of symbol variations). When the value of the probability variation counter is "0", the main CPU 61 shifts the processing to S189. On the other hand, when the value of the probability variation counter is not "0", the main CPU 61 shifts the processing to S185.

In S185, the main CPU 61 performs a process of subtracting 1 from the value of the probability variation counter. When this process ends, the process moves to S186.

In S186, the main CPU 61 determines again whether the value of the probability variation counter is "0". When the value of the probability variation counter is “0”, the main CPU 61 shifts the processing to S187. On the other hand, if the value of the probability variation counter is not "0", the main CPU 61 shifts the processing to S189.

In S187, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting a probability variation end command. In this process, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting (storing) a probability variation end command indicating the end of the probability variation game state in the main RAM 63. Then, the probability variation end command is supplied from the main CPU 61 of the main control circuit 60 to the sub CPU 71 of the sub control circuit 70 as a command indicating the game state, so that the sub control circuit 70 recognizes the end of the probability variation game state. Become. When this process ends, the process moves to S188.

In S188, the main CPU 61 performs processing for clearing the game state flag. That is, the main CPU 61 executes a process of setting a value (00H) indicating the normal game state (inaccurate change/non-time saving) in the game state flag. When this process ends, the process moves to S189.

In S189, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether or not it is a small hit. When the main CPU 61 determines that it is a small hit, the main CPU 61 shifts the processing to S190. On the other hand, if the main CPU 61 determines that it is not a small hit, it moves the process to S194.

In S190, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting the value of the waiting time timer as the hit start interval time corresponding to the special symbol in the main RAM 63. When this process ends, the process moves to S191. In the present embodiment, the hit start interval time corresponding to the case where the second special symbol is the "probability variation 1" to "probability variation 6" is a right end of the special winning opening shutter 37A after the game ball is fired. It is shorter than 3000 ms which is the shortest time to reach the portion, for example, 2500 ms.

In S191, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting a hit start display command corresponding to the special symbol. In this process, the hit start display command is supplied from the main CPU 61 of the main control circuit 60 to the sub CPU 71 of the sub control circuit 70 so that the sub control circuit 70 starts the big hit game state or the small hit game state. Become aware. The hit start display command includes data indicating the start of the big hit game state or the small hit game state and a specific hit pattern. The sub CPU 71 determines an effect pattern such as an additional pattern in the big hit game state or the small hit game state based on the data indicating the hit pattern included in the hit start display command. When this process ends, the process moves to S192.

In S192, the main CPU 61 performs processing for clearing the value of the special winning opening opening counter. When this process ends, the process moves to S193.

In S193, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting a value (03H) indicating the hit start interval management process in the control state flag of the main RAM 63. When this process ends, the special symbol display time management process routine ends.

In S194, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting a value (07H) indicating the ending process of the special symbol game as the control state flag of the main RAM 63. When this process ends, the special symbol display time management process routine ends.

[Hit start interval management processing]
FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing a hit start interval management process executed by the main CPU 61. The hit start interval management process is executed in the following steps.

As shown in FIG. 27, in S200, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether or not the control state flag has a value (03H) indicating the hit start interval management process. When determining that the control state flag is the value (03H) indicating the hit start interval management process, the main CPU 61 shifts the process to S201. On the other hand, when determining that the control state flag is not the value (03H) indicating the hit start interval management processing, the main CPU 61 ends the hit start interval management processing routine.

In S201, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not the value of the waiting time timer as the hit start interval time is "0". When determining that the value of the waiting time timer is “0”, the main CPU 61 shifts the processing to S202. On the other hand, when determining that the value of the waiting time timer is not “0”, the main CPU 61 ends the hit start interval management processing routine.

In S202, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether or not it is a big hit. When the main CPU 61 determines that it is a big hit, it shifts the processing to S203. On the other hand, if the main CPU 61 determines that it is not a big hit, it shifts the processing to S205.

In S203, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting (storing) the special winning opening opening counter upper limit value in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63, and then shifts the process to S204.

In S204, the main CPU 61 performs a process of adding "1" to the special winning opening opening counter, and moves the process to S205.

In S205, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting (storing) hit pattern data indicating a special winning opening opening/closing pattern according to the type of the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63. The main CPU 61 carries out round control based on the hit pattern (big winning opening opening/closing pattern) shown in FIG. 9 corresponding to the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol determined in S205. When this process ends, the process moves to S206.

In S206, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting (storing) a special winning opening open display command in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63. The special winning opening open display command in this case is data indicating the start of the round game. The special winning opening open display command is supplied from the main CPU 61 of the main control circuit 60 to the sub CPU 71 of the sub control circuit 70. When this process ends, the process moves to S207.

In S207, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting a value (04H) indicating a special winning opening opening process in a predetermined area functioning as a control state flag in the main RAM 63 as a control state flag. When this process ends, the process moves to S208.

In S208, the main CPU 61 performs a process of clearing the value of the special winning opening winning counter of the main RAM 63. When this process ends, the process moves to S209.

In S209, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting the value of the waiting time timer as the special winning opening opening time in the main RAM 63. The value of the waiting time timer is set as 10 s according to the value (the number of rounds) of the special winning opening opening counter, for example, if the big hit symbol of the first special symbol is "probability variation 1". When this process ends, the process moves to S210.

In S210, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting the special winning opening open data in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63. In this process, the main CPU 61 updates the variable positioned in the main RAM 63 based on the data read from the main ROM 62 in order to open the special winning opening 37. The variable stored in this way drives the special winning opening shutter solenoid 370A to open the special winning opening 37. When this process ends, the hit start interval management process routine ends. In this embodiment, the data corresponding to any of the opening/closing patterns A to C is set as the data for opening the special winning opening.

[Waiting management process before re-opening the big winning a prize]
FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing the waiting time management processing before the special winning opening reopening executed by the main CPU 61. This special winning opening re-opening waiting time question management processing is executed in the following steps.

As shown in FIG. 28, in S220, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether or not the control state flag is a value (05H) indicating the waiting time before pre-reopening big winning opening management process. When the main CPU 61 determines that the control state flag is the value (05H) indicating the waiting time before special winning opening reopening management processing, the main CPU 61 shifts the processing to S221. On the other hand, when the main CPU 61 determines that the control state flag is not the value (05H) indicating the waiting time management processing before the special winning opening reopening, the main CPU 61 ends the waiting time management processing routine before the special winning opening reopening.

In S221, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not the value of the waiting time timer as the inter-round interval display time is “0”. When determining that the value of the waiting time timer is “0”, the main CPU 61 shifts the processing to S222. On the other hand, when determining that the value of the waiting time timer is not “0”, the main CPU 61 ends the special winning opening pre-reopening waiting time management processing routine.

In S222, the main CPU 61 performs a process of adding "1" to the value of the special winning opening opening counter of the main RAM 63. When this process ends, the process moves to S223.

In S223, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting (storing) a special winning opening open display command in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63. The special winning opening open display command in this case is data indicating the start of the round game. The special winning opening opening display command is supplied from the main CPU 61 of the main control circuit 60 to the sub CPU 71 of the sub control circuit 70 as a special winning opening opening display command. When this process ends, the process moves to S224.

In S224, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting a value (04H) indicating the special winning opening opening process in a predetermined area functioning as a control state flag in the main RAM 63, in the control state flag. When this process ends, the process moves to S225.

In S225, the main CPU 61 performs a process of clearing the value of the special winning opening winning counter of the main RAM 63. When this process ends, the process moves to S226.

In S226, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting the value of the waiting time timer as the special winning opening opening time in the main RAM 63. When this process ends, the process moves to S227.

In S227, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting the special winning opening opening data in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63. When this processing ends, the special winning opening re-opening waiting time question management processing routine ends. Also in this process, the data corresponding to any of the opening/closing patterns A to C is set as the special winning opening opening data.

[Processing during opening of the special winning opening]
FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing the special winning opening opening process executed by the main CPU 61. This special winning opening opening process is executed in the following steps.

As shown in FIG. 29, in S230, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether or not the control state flag is the value (04H) indicating the special winning opening opening process. When determining that the control state flag is the value (04H) indicating the special winning opening opening process, the main CPU 61 shifts the process to S231. On the other hand, when the main CPU 61 determines that the control state flag is not the value (04H) indicating the special winning opening opening processing, the main CPU 61 ends the special winning opening opening processing routine.

In S231, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not the value of the special winning opening prize counter is "1" or more. In this process, when determining that the value of the special winning opening prize counter is "1" or more, the main CPU 61 shifts the process to S234. On the other hand, the main CPU 61 shifts the processing to S232 when determining that the value of the special winning opening prize counter is not “1” or more.

In S232, the main CPU 61 executes a special winning opening opening/closing process according to the opening/closing pattern for each set round in the type of big hit and the current round, and moves the process to S233. In S232, the special winning opening opening/closing processing corresponding to the opening/closing pattern corresponding to the small hit is also executed.

In S233, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not the waiting time timer as the special winning opening opening time is "0". When determining that the waiting time timer is “0”, the main CPU 61 shifts the processing to S234. On the other hand, when determining that the waiting time timer is not “0”, the main CPU 61 terminates the special winning opening opening processing routine.

In S234, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting the special winning opening closing data. In this process, the main CPU 61 updates the variable located in the main RAM 63 based on the data read from the main ROM 62 in order to close the special winning opening. The variable thus stored is for closing the special winning opening shutter solenoid 370A. When this process ends, the process moves to S235.

In S235, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether or not it is a small hit. When the main CPU 61 determines that it is a small hit, the main CPU 61 shifts the processing to S240. On the other hand, if the main CPU 61 determines that it is not a small hit, it moves the process to S236.

In S236, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not the value of the special winning opening opening number counter is equal to or larger than the upper limit value of the special winning opening opening number (round number). In this processing, the main CPU 61 compares the value of the special winning opening opening number counter stored in the main RAM 63 with the upper limit of the special winning opening opening number (round number), and the value of the special winning opening opening number counter. Is greater than or equal to the upper limit of the number of times of opening the special winning opening. In this embodiment, the upper limit value of the number of times of opening the special winning opening is 16 (16R). When determining that the value of the special winning opening opening counter is equal to or larger than the upper limit of the winning opening opening count, the main CPU 61 shifts the processing to S240. On the other hand, when the main CPU 61 does not determine that the value of the special winning opening opening number counter is equal to or larger than the upper limit of the special winning opening opening number, the main CPU 61 shifts the processing to S237.

In S237, the main CPU 61 performs processing for setting the value of the waiting time timer as the inter-round interval display time in the main RAM 63. As the inter-round interval display time, the time corresponding to the interval patterns a to d is set. When this process ends, the process moves to S238.

In S238, the main CPU 61 performs processing for setting a value (05H) indicating the special winning opening pre-reopening waiting time management processing in a predetermined area functioning as a control state flag in the main RAM 63. When this process ends, the process moves to S239.

In S239, the main CPU 61 carries out a process of setting the inter-round display command in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63. The display command between rounds is supplied from the main CPU 61 of the main control circuit 60 to the sub CPU 71 of the sub control circuit 70. When this process ends, the special winning opening opening process routine ends.

On the other hand, in S240, the main CPU 61 performs processing for setting the value of the waiting time timer as the hit end interval display time in the main RAM 63. When this process ends, the process moves to S241.

In S241, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting a value (06H) indicating the hit end interval management process in the control state flag in a predetermined area in the main RAM 63 that functions as a control state flag. When this process ends, the process moves to S242.

In S242, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting a hit end display command in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63. The hit end display command is supplied from the main CPU 61 of the main control circuit 60 to the sub CPU 71 of the sub control circuit 70 as a command indicating the end of the big hit game state or the small hit game state. When this process ends, the special winning opening opening process routine ends.

[Hit end interval management processing]
FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing the hit end interval management processing executed by the main CPU 61. The hit end interval management processing is executed in the following steps.

As shown in FIG. 30, in S250, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether or not the control state flag of the main RAM 63 has a value (06H) indicating the hit end interval management process. When determining that the control state flag is the value (06H) indicating the hit end interval management processing, the main CPU 61 shifts the processing to S251. On the other hand, when determining that the control state flag is not the value (06H) indicating the hit end interval management processing, the main CPU 61 ends the hit end interval management processing routine.

In S251, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not the value of the waiting time timer as the hit end interval display time is "0". In this process, when determining that the value of the waiting time timer is "0", the main CPU 61 shifts the process to S252. On the other hand, when determining that the value of the waiting time timer is not "0", the main CPU 61 ends the hit end interval management processing routine.

In S252, the main CPU 61 sets a value (07H) indicating the end of the special symbol game in the main RAM 63 to the special symbol control state flag. When this process ends, the process moves to S253.

In S253, the main CPU 61 carries out a process of determining whether or not the type of the finished hit game state is a big hit. When the main CPU 61 determines that it is a big hit, it shifts the processing to S254. On the other hand, when the main CPU 61 determines that it is not a big hit, the main CPU 61 shifts the processing to S256.

In S254, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting "01H" in the game state flag of the main RAM 63. "01H" of the gaming state flag indicates the probability variation gaming state and the time saving gaming state. In addition, "00H" of the gaming state flag indicates a non-probability variation gaming state and a non-time saving gaming state. When this process ends, the process moves to S255.

In S255, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting the value of the probability variation counter of the main RAM 63 to "10" as the ST number. When this processing ends, the hit end interval management processing routine ends.

In S256, the main CPU 61 sets a game state command and ends the hit end interval management processing routine. The gaming state command is a command including information indicating a gaming state controlled after the jackpot gaming state is finished, and information indicating a type (hit, small hit) of the finished gaming state. Such a game state command is supplied from the main CPU 61 of the main control circuit 60 to the sub CPU 71 of the sub control circuit 70.

[Special symbol game end processing]
FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing a special symbol game ending process executed by the main CPU 61. This special symbol game ending process is executed in the following steps.

As shown in FIG. 31, in S260, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether or not the control state flag of the main RAM 63 is the value (07H) indicating the special symbol game end process. When determining that the control state flag is the value (07H) indicating the special symbol game ending process, the main CPU 61 shifts the process to S261. On the other hand, when determining that the control state flag is not the value (07H) indicating the special symbol game ending process, the main CPU 61 ends the special symbol game ending process routine.

In S261, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting a value (00H) indicating a special symbol storage check in the main RAM 63 as a control state flag. When this process ends, the special symbol game end process routine ends.

[Control by sub CPU]
Next, the processing executed by the sub CPU 71 will be described below with reference to FIGS. The sub CPU 71 of the sub control circuit 70 receives various commands from the main control circuit 60 and performs various processing such as display control processing.

[Main processing by sub CPU]
FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing a main process executed by the sub CPU 71. This main process is executed in the following steps.

As shown in FIG. 32, in S270, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of initializing when the power is turned on. When this process ends, the process moves to S271.

In S271, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of updating a random number value stored in the work RAM 73 (random number counter value for effect determination, random number counter value for stop symbol determination, etc.). When this process ends, the process moves to S272.

In S272, the sub CPU 71 performs command analysis processing. Although details of this process will be described later, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of analyzing a command received from the main control circuit 60 and stored in the reception buffer of the work RAM 73. When this process ends, the process moves to S273. The command analysis process will be described later with reference to FIG.

In S273, the sub CPU 71 performs display control processing. In this process, the sub CPU 71 transmits to the display control circuit 76 data for displaying in the display area 4A of the liquid crystal display device 4. The display control circuit 76 including a VDP (Video Display Processor) stores various image data such as identification pattern data, background image data, and effect image data based on the data for displaying the effect image from the sub CPU 71. The data is read from the image data ROM, superimposed on each other, and displayed on the display area 4A of the liquid crystal display device 4. When this process ends, the process moves to S274.

In S274, the sub CPU 71 performs a voice control process for controlling sounds generated from the speakers 10a, 10b, 10c via the voice control circuit 77. When this process ends, the process moves to S275.

In S275, the sub CPU 71 executes a lamp control process for controlling the light emission (lighting/blinking) of the lamp/LED 27 via the lamp control circuit 78. When this process ends, the process moves to S276.

In S276, the sub CPU 71 performs a movable effect device control process via the movable effect device control circuit 79. In this process, the sub CPU 71 executes a control process for controlling the movable effect device 42 that drives the upper movable effect member 42A and the lower movable effect member 42B. When this process ends, the process moves to S271, and thereafter, the processes of S271 to S276 are repeated.

On the other hand, the sub CPU 71 may interrupt the main process and execute the command reception interrupt process and the timer interrupt process even when the main process is being executed. The command reception interrupt process will be described below with reference to FIG. 33, and the timer interrupt process will be described with reference to FIG.

[Command reception interrupt processing]
FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing the command reception interrupt process executed by the sub CPU 71. This command reception interrupt process is executed in the following steps.

As shown in FIG. 33, in S280, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of saving the register. In this process, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of saving the running program stored in each register (storage area). When this process ends, the process moves to S281.

In S281, the sub CPU 71 performs processing for storing the input command in the reception buffer. In this process, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of storing the input command in the reception buffer area of the work RAM 73. For example, the sub CPU 71 receives various commands transmitted from the main control circuit 60. In this process, the stored command is analyzed by the command analysis process of FIG. When this process ends, the process moves to S282.

In S282, the sub CPU 71 performs processing to restore the register. In this process, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of restoring the program saved in S280 to each register. When this process ends, the command reception interrupt process routine ends.

[Timer interrupt processing]
FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing the timer interrupt process executed by the sub CPU 71. This timer interrupt process is executed in the following steps.

As shown in FIG. 34, in S290, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of saving the register. In this process, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of saving the value used in the program being executed stored in each register (storage area). When this process ends, the process moves to S291.

In S291, the sub CPU 71 performs various timer update processing. When this process ends, the process moves to S292.

In S292, the sub CPU 71 performs a pressing operation button operation determination process. In this process, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of detecting whether or not the pressing operation button 9A has been operated. This process is actually a determination process, but since it is an interrupt process, it will be described as one routine here. When this process ends, the process moves to S293.

In S293, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of restoring the register. In this process, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of restoring the program saved in S290 to each register. When this process ends, the timer interrupt process routine ends.

[Command analysis processing]
FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing command analysis processing executed by the sub CPU 71. This command analysis processing is executed in the following steps.

As shown in FIG. 35, in S300, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not a command has been received. In this process, if the sub CPU 71 determines that the command has been received, the process proceeds to S301. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 71 determines that the command has not been received, the sub CPU 71 ends this command analysis processing routine.

In S301, the sub CPU 71 reads the data of the received command and performs the process according to the data of the command in the subsequent steps. When the reading of the data of the received command is completed, the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to S302.

In S302, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not a variation pattern designation command has been received as the command read in S301. When the sub CPU 71 determines that the fluctuation pattern designation command is received as the read command, the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to S303. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 71 determines that the variation pattern designation command is not received as the read command, the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to S304.

In S303, the sub CPU 71 performs effect pattern determination processing. In this process, the sub CPU 71 determines the effect pattern including the variable display mode of the decorative pattern based on the received variation pattern designation command. When the variable display mode of the decorative design is determined, the sub CPU 71 sets the determined effect pattern data in a predetermined storage area of the work RAM 73. When this processing ends, the command analysis processing routine ends.

In S304, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not a symbol designating command is received as the command read in S301. When the sub CPU 71 determines that the symbol designating command is received as the read command, the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to S305. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 71 determines that the symbol designating command is not received as the read command, the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to S306.

In S305, the sub CPU 71 performs a stop symbol determination process. In this process, the sub CPU 71 determines the stop decoration symbol corresponding to the symbol designation command received from the main CPU 61. When the stop decoration pattern is determined, the sub CPU 71 sets the determined stop decoration pattern data in a predetermined storage area of the work RAM 73. When this processing ends, the command analysis processing routine ends.

The decorative patterns displayed in the display area 4A of the liquid crystal display device 4 include, for example, numbers “1” to “7”, and these decorative patterns (numbers) are a predetermined number (for example, three (three digits). )) is aligned with the same decorative pattern (number), basically shifts to the big hit game state. Specifically, when the jackpot symbol of the second special symbol is "probability variation 1", with a predetermined probability (for example, 1/10 of the probability when the second special symbol is "probability variation 1"), The decorative pattern is a series of numbers "3" or "7". In addition, the decorative symbols corresponding to the first special symbol jackpot pattern "probability variation 1" are the numbers "1", "2", "4" to "6", and the second special symbol jackpot symbol " The decorative patterns corresponding to the probability variation 1 to the probability variation 6 are the numbers "1", "2", and "4" to "6". In addition, the decorative design corresponding to the small hitting design is a specific result that is, for example, the number “135” as a combination of the specific designs, and the decorative design corresponding to the loss is a variation other than the specific appearance. Regarding the correspondence relationship between the big hit pattern and the decorative pattern, as a uniquely defined relationship, for example, the decorative pattern corresponding to the big hit pattern "probability variation 1" is set to "3" or "7", and the big hit pattern "probability variation". The decorative symbols corresponding to "2" to "probability variation 6" may be a series of "1", "2", and "4" to "6". In addition, for example, in the case of the "large addition bonus", the decoration pattern is set to "3" or "7", and in the case of the "middle addition bonus", the decoration pattern is set to "1" or "5". In the case of "Small additional bonus" and "No additional bonus", the decorative pattern is set to "2", "4", or "6", and the decorative pattern is stopped for each type of big hit. May be uniquely determined.

In S306, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the symbol stop command is received as the command read in S301. When the sub CPU 71 determines that the symbol stop command is received as the read command, the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to S307. On the other hand, if the sub CPU 71 determines that the symbol stop command is not received as the read command, the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to S308.

In S307, the sub CPU 71 performs a decorative symbol stop process for stopping and displaying the decorative symbol that is being variably displayed. When this processing ends, the command analysis processing routine ends.

In S308, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the hit start display command is received as the command read in S301. When determining that the hit start display command has been received as the read command, the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to S309. On the other hand, when determining that the hit start display command has not been received as the read command, the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to S310.

In S309, the sub CPU 71 executes a hit effect pattern determination process. The hit effect pattern determination processing will be described later with reference to FIG. When this processing ends, the command analysis processing routine ends.

In S310, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the special winning opening open display command is received as the command read in S301. If the sub CPU 71 determines that it has received the special winning opening open display command as the read command, the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to S311. On the other hand, if the sub CPU 71 determines that it has not received the special winning opening open display command as the read command, the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to S312.

In S311, the sub CPU 71 executes an in-round effect process. The production process during this round will be described later with reference to FIG. When this processing ends, the command analysis processing routine ends.

In S312, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the hit end display command is received as the command read in S301. When the sub CPU 71 determines that the hit end display command is received as the read command, the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to S313. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 71 determines that the hit end display command is not received as the read command, the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to S314.

In S313, the sub CPU 71 executes a hit end effect process. The hit end effect process will be described later with reference to FIG. 38. When this processing ends, the command analysis processing routine ends.

In S314, the sub CPU 71 executes other processes corresponding to the received command. When this processing ends, the command analysis processing routine ends.

[Hit effect pattern determination process]
FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing a hit effect pattern determination process executed by the sub CPU 71. The hit effect pattern determination process is a process for determining an addition pattern or the like as an effect pattern in the big hit game state, and is executed in the following steps.

As shown in FIG. 36, in S320, the sub CPU 71 executes a hit effect pattern type determination process. In this process, the sub CPU 71 sets one of "01H" to "08H" in the hit effect pattern flag in accordance with the stop symbol designating information of the special symbol included in the received hit start display command. Regarding the hit effect pattern flag, "01H" corresponds to a normal bonus, and "02H" to "07H" are respectively a large addition bonus, a medium addition bonus 1 and 2, a small addition bonus 1 and 2, and no addition bonus. Correspondingly, "08H" corresponds to a small hit. When this process ends, the process moves to S321.

In S321, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether the value of the hit effect pattern flag is any of "02H" to "07H". That is, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the addition bonus or the non-addition bonus is started based on the value of the hit effect pattern flag. When it is determined that the value of the hit effect pattern flag is any of "02H" to "07H", the process is moved to S322. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the hit effect pattern flag is neither "02H" to "07H", the process proceeds to S328.

In S322, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of selecting the additional pattern selection table according to the value of the hit effect pattern flag. When this process ends, the process moves to S323.

In S323, the sub CPU 71 refers to the selected additional pattern selection table and performs a process of selecting one of the additional patterns. At this time, for example, one of the addition patterns can be selected using the random number value for effect determination. When this process ends, the process moves to S324.

In S324, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting a value corresponding to the selected addition pattern to the addition pattern flag. In this embodiment, 21 patterns are provided as additional patterns, and the large additional patterns 1 to 4, the medium additional patterns 1 to 8, the small additional patterns 1 to 8 and the no additional pattern 1 are added to the additional patterns. The flags “01H” to “15H” correspond. When this process ends, the process moves to S325.

In S325, the sub CPU 71 refers to the additional character selection table and performs a process of selecting an additional character according to the value of the additional pattern flag. At this time, for example, one of the characters to be added can be selected by using the random number value for effect determination. As the additional characters, the additional characters “animal”, “female”, and “fireworks” are selected. When this process ends, the process moves to S326.

In S326, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting effect data in the hit start interval corresponding to the value of the additional pattern flag. That is, the sub CPU 71 sets the effect data up to the start of the round game, including the display of the additional characters determined based on the additional character selection table and the display of the number of additional characters as the initial value. When this process ends, the process moves to S327.

In S327, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting "240" in the prize ball number counter. The value "240" corresponds to at least the number of prize balls to be paid out in the 16R round game, and is displayed as the initial value of the planned number of prize balls in the winning start interval. When no notification of the number of additions is made, that is, in the case of a bonus without addition, “240” as the initial value is continuously displayed without being added over each round. When this process ends, the hit effect pattern determination process routine ends.

In S328, the sub CPU 71 performs processing for setting effect data in the hit start interval according to the value of the hit effect pattern flag. That is, the sub CPU 71 sets the effect data up to the start of the round game corresponding to the normal bonus or the small hit. When this process ends, the hit effect pattern determination process routine ends.

[Direction processing during the round]
FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing the in-round effect process executed by the sub CPU 71. The in-round effect process is a process for determining whether or not to notify the number of additions for each round, and is executed in the following steps.

As shown in FIG. 37, in S330, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of adding 1 to the value of the round counter. The round counter is a counter that is incremented by 1 each time a round game is executed (each time a special winning opening open display command is received), and the number of rounds currently being executed (the number of round games that have been executed). It is a counter for indicating the number of times and basically counts the same value as the special winning opening opening number counter used in the main CPU 61. When this process ends, the process moves to S331.

In S331, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the additional bonus (including the additional bonus) is being executed based on the value of the hit effect pattern flag. When the value of the hit effect pattern flag corresponds to any of “02H” to “07H” and it is determined that the additional bonus is being executed, the process proceeds to S332. On the other hand, if the value of the hit effect pattern flag is neither "02H" to "07H" and it is determined that the additional bonus is not being executed, the process proceeds to S336.

In S332, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of selecting an additional pattern table according to the value of the hit effect pattern flag. When this process ends, the process moves to S333.

In S333, the sub CPU 71 refers to the selected addition pattern table, and notifies the number of additions based on the value of the addition pattern flag (addition pattern) and the value (round number) indicated by the round number counter. Processing for determining whether or not If it is determined that it is a round for notifying the number of additions, the process proceeds to S334. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not the round in which the additional number is notified, the process proceeds to S336.

In S334, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting data for notifying the number of additions based on the addition pattern table. As a result, the number of additional characters is displayed together with the selected additional character in the display area 4A during the corresponding round. When this process ends, the process moves to S335.

In S335, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of adding a value corresponding to the added number to the prize ball number counter. As a result, in the prize ball number counter, the additional value defined based on the addition pattern table is added from the initial value "240", and the counter value is increased to the planned prize ball number with each addition. For example, in the case of the large addition pattern 4, the addition number "135" is added in the 1st, 4th, and 7th rounds, and finally the planned prize ball number "645" that is combined with the initial value "240" is displayed. Will be done. Although the planned number of prize balls is displayed based on the value of the prize ball number counter, the planned number of prize balls is not displayed immediately after the addition to the prize ball number counter, and the performance according to the addition is executed. It will be added later. When this process ends, the process moves to S336.

In S336, the sub CPU 71 performs processing for setting the in-round effect data according to the value of the round number counter. For example, the sub CPU 71 sets data for displaying different effects including a background image for the first to seventh eyes and the eighth to sixteenth eyes in the case of the bonus to be added. In the case of normal bonus and small hit, the same effect data is always set in any round. When this process ends, the in-round effect process routine ends.

[Winning finish production process]
FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing a hit end effect process executed by the sub CPU 71. The hit end effect process is a process for determining the effect contents in the hit end interval when the big hit or the small hit ends, and is executed in the following steps.

As shown in FIG. 38, in S340, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the hit effect pattern flag is "02H" to "07H". That is, the sub CPU 71 determines whether the bonus is a bonus to be added or a bonus not to be added, based on the value of the hit effect pattern flag. When it is determined that the value of the hit effect pattern flag is any of "02H" to "07H", the process is moved to S341. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the hit effect pattern flag is neither "02H" to "07H", the process proceeds to S342.

In S341, the sub CPU 71 sets the value of the prize ball number counter to "0" and resets the counter value. Although the planned number of prize balls is displayed based on the value of the prize ball number counter, the planned number of prize balls is not displayed as 0 immediately after the reset of the prize ball number counter, but is performed after a predetermined time has elapsed. Along with this, the display of the expected number of prize balls can be switched. Further, when the value of the prize ball number counter is reset, the planned prize ball number may not be displayed as “0” but the display itself of the planned prize ball number may be hidden. When this process ends, the process moves to S342.

In S342, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting end effect data according to the value of the hit effect pattern flag. That is, the sub CPU 71 sets the effect data at the end of the winning gaming state. At this time, as the finish effect data, data of different effect contents is set depending on whether a normal bonus, an additional bonus (including no additional bonus), or a small hit. When this process ends, the process moves to S343.

In S343, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting "00H" in the hit effect pattern flag. When this process ends, the process moves to S344.

In S344, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting "0" in the round number counter. When this process ends, the hit end effect process routine ends.

[Operation example when over-winning occurs]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 39 to 41, an operation example when an over-winning occurs at the special winning opening 37 will be described.

39 and 40 are views for explaining the operation of the special winning opening shutter 37A when an over-winning occurs. Note that FIG. 39 and FIG. 40 schematically show the behavior from the start of the hit start interval in the big addition bonus to the inter-round interval after the end of the 2R after the 1R, but for convenience, the 1R and the 2R As the inter-round interval between the eyes, unlike the one shown in FIG. 9 described above, the interval pattern d is applied. Further, the game balls are continuously shot immediately after the start of the hit start interval, and after 3.1 s have uniformly passed on the right end portion of the special winning opening shutter 37A (in the open state, the right end portion of the corresponding special winning opening 37). Shall be reached. Each game ball is numbered in the order of launch, such as (0), (1),....

First, as shown in FIG. 39(A), the special winning opening shutter 37A keeps the special winning opening 37 closed until, for example, 2.5 s, which is the hit start interval time, elapses. That is, since the hit start interval time is shorter than the shortest time 3s required for the game ball to reach the right end portion of the special winning opening shutter 37A after the game ball is launched, immediately after the start of the hit start interval. Even when the rightward hitting of the game ball is started, the game ball does not reach the right end portion of the special winning opening shutter 37A that closes the special winning opening 37.

Next, as shown in FIG. 39(B), when the hit start interval time elapses, the first winning combination starts, and the special winning opening shutter 37A is retracted in the direction of the white arrow to open the special winning opening 37. And Even at this time, the game ball has not reached the right end of the special winning opening 37.

After that, as shown in FIG. 39(C), the game ball (0) launched immediately after the start of the hit start interval is in the open state along the upper surface 43a of the cover member 43 (not shown) of the special winning opening 37. It rolls near the right end.

After that, as shown in FIG. 39(D), the game ball (0) passes through the opened special winning opening 37 and drops downward, and the big winning opening count switch 370 detects the winning. .. In other words, when the winning number reaching the prescribed winning number "1" is detected, the first round ends and the inter-round interval before the second round starts. At this time, the time from the start of the hit start interval to the detection of the winning of the game ball (0) immediately after that is about 3.2 s.

Next, as shown in FIG. 39(E), with the start of the inter-round interval, the special winning opening shutter 37A starts to move in the direction of the white arrow to close the special winning opening 37 again. To do. At this time, the special winning opening shutter 37A completes the operation of projecting from the open position to the closed position in about 0.01 s. In addition, since the interval between the game balls is 0.66 s, the next game ball (1) has reached the vicinity of the right end of the special winning opening 37 that is in the process of being closed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 39(F), when the special winning opening shutter 37A completely closes the special winning opening 37 during the inter-round interval before the start of the second round, the game ball (1) receives the big winning. The right end portion of the mouth shutter 37A is reached. The time for the game ball (1) to reach such a position is approximately 3.1 s after the launch, and when calculated from the start time of the inter-round interval (time of FIG. 39(D)), it is approximately 0.56 s. It will be after a lapse of time.

After that, as shown in FIGS. 40G to 40I, the special winning opening shutter 37A closes the special winning opening 37 until a time defined as an interval between rounds, for example, 2.97 s of the interval pattern d elapses. State. Meanwhile, on the upper surface of the special winning opening shutter 37A, the game balls (1) to (4) pass from the right side to the left side in a state of being arranged in a line. At this time, the game balls (1) to (4) sequentially reach the right end portion of the special winning opening shutter 37A approximately every 0.66 seconds, and further roll at a speed of about 22 mm every 0.66 seconds. To go. As a result, the four game balls (1) to (4) are placed on the upper surface of the special winning opening shutter 37A while being spaced by about one space. Note that when counting from the start time of the inter-round interval (time of FIG. 39(D)), the time to reach the state of FIG. 40(G) is after about 1.22 s and reaches the state of FIG. 40(H). The time is about 1.88 s, and the time to reach the state of FIG. 40(I) is about 2.54 s.

Then, as shown in FIG. 40(J), when 2.97 s of the interval pattern d elapses, the inter-round interval ends and the second round starts, and the special winning opening shutter 37A operates for about 0.01 s. Then, the special winning opening 37 is opened again by retracting in the direction of the white arrow. At this time, on the upper surface of the special winning opening shutter 37A, the game balls (1) to (4) are still passing at a relatively low speed. As a result, the four gaming balls (1) to (4) simultaneously pass through the opened special winning opening 37 and drop downward, and the four winning balls are counted by the special winning opening count switch 370. Is detected. In other words, immediately after the start of the second round after the interval between rounds is finished, four over-wins are detected in addition to one win of the specified winning number. Similarly, if the interval pattern c is 2.31s, 1+2 over-wins are detected, and if the interval pattern b is 1.65s, 1+1 over-wins are detected and the interval pattern a is 0. If it is .3 s, it can be easily understood that only one winning corresponding to the specified number of winnings is detected, but no over-winning is detected.

After that, as shown in FIG. 40(K), the winning of the game ball (the game ball (4) not shown in the figure in the figure) that first reaches the position of the special winning opening count switch 370 is detected, and the 2R is detected. The eye ends and the inter-round interval before the start of the 3rd round starts. At this time, the next game ball (5) is located in the vicinity of the right end of the special winning opening 37 that is in the transition to the closed state.

Then, as shown in FIG. 40(L), when the special winning opening shutter 37A completely closes the special winning opening 37 again in the inter-round interval before the start of the 3rd round, the gaming ball (5) wins the big winning prize. The right end portion of the mouth shutter 37A is reached. By controlling such a series of operation timings based on the interval patterns b to d, one to three over-winning prizes are realized in the second and subsequent predetermined rounds.

FIG. 41 is a diagram for explaining various operation timings related to the special winning opening, and shows operation timings in the large addition bonus according to FIGS. 39 and 40. Note that, also in FIG. 41, for convenience, the interval pattern d is applied as the inter-round interval between the first and second rounds or after the end of the second round, unlike that shown in FIG. 9 described above. The “firing state” indicates a state in which no firing operation is performed or a firing stop operation is performed as “unfired”, and a state in which a firing operation is performed is indicated as “fired”. “Game state” indicates a round game and an interval in the big hit game state. “Required time” indicates the time required for the round game and the interval. The “special winning opening” indicates a closed state or an open state of the special winning opening 37. The “number of balls on the shutter” indicates the number of game balls located along the upper surface of the special winning opening shutter 37A. The "elapsed time after the change in the number of balls on the shutter" indicates the elapsed time when the number of game balls on the upper surface of the special winning opening shutter 37A changes. The “illustrated state” indicates the symbol at the end of FIGS. 39(A) to 40(L). It should be noted that (E) and (K) shown as the illustrated states are indicated by "*" because the special winning opening 37 is not in a completely closed state.

As shown in FIG. 41, if the big hit is confirmed (the big hit starts) and the shooting operation is started approximately 0.1 s after that, the time until the game ball is actually shot is about 0.66 s. It takes about 3.1 s until the game ball thus shot reaches the right end portion of the special winning opening shutter 37A. On the other hand, when the winning start interval of 2.5 s has elapsed since the big hit was confirmed, the big winning opening 37 is in the open state. As a result, the game ball that has reached the position corresponding to the right end portion of the special winning opening shutter 37A is detected by the special winning opening count switch 370 in approximately 0.1 seconds. That is, the time from when the big hit is confirmed to when the launch operation is started until the first gaming ball thus launched is detected by the special winning opening count switch 370 is 0.1+0.66+3.1+0.1= It will be 3.96s. A time of 1.46 s obtained by subtracting 2.5 s of the hit start interval from this time is the opening time of 1R.

After that, the interval between rounds after the end of the first round is started, and the special winning opening 37 is closed again. At this time, the special winning opening 37 is closed for 2.97 s of the interval pattern d. And, in the special winning opening shutter 37A in the closed state, the game balls located on the upper surface increase by one every approximately 0.66 s, and the big winning opening 37 is opened again by the start of the second round. Four gaming balls are supported by the special winning opening shutter 37A. Therefore, when the second prize is started and the special winning opening 37 is opened, the winning of four gaming balls is detected. When the winning of one of the game balls is first detected after a lapse of about 0.1 s, the special winning opening 37 is closed, and the inter-round interval after the end of the second round is started, and also in the third round (not shown). The winning of the individual game balls will be detected. In this way, if the interval time between rounds is set to 2.97 s of the interval pattern d, 1+3 over-winning prizes can be realized. Similarly, if the interval pattern c is 2.31s, 1+2 over-winnings can be realized, and if the interval pattern b is 1.65s, 1+1 over-winnings can be realized.

[Example of bonus screen display]
42 to 44 are diagrams showing examples of screen display of the bonus to be added. 42 is a screen display example of the additional bonus corresponding to the large addition pattern 1, FIG. 43 is an example display screen of the additional bonus corresponding to the small addition pattern 5, and FIG. 44 is corresponding to the non-addition pattern 1. It is an example of a screen display of a bonus to be added.

First, as shown in FIG. 42(A), when the large addition bonus according to the hit pattern 2 is determined as the addition bonus and the large addition pattern 1 is selected as the addition pattern, the screen of the display area 4A in the hit start interval is displayed. An image 700 indicating the start of the bonus to be added is displayed on the top, and an image 701 urging the player to hit the right is displayed. At this time, an added character 702A of, for example, "fireworks master" selected by lottery appears on the screen, and then an image 703 showing the initial value "+240" of the planned number of prize balls is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 42(B), when the first round is started, a display field 704 indicating the type of character to be added, a planned number of prize balls for each addition of the number of characters to be added, is displayed on the screen of the display area 4A. Is displayed, and a display column 706 for displaying the period of the first half round as the “additional specialization zone” and the period of the latter half round as the “prize sphere increasing zone” described later. Such display fields 704 to 706 are displayed until the end of 16 rounds. For example, in the display field 704, "fireworks" corresponding to the additional character 702A is displayed until the end of 16 rounds. On the other hand, in the display field 705, after the additional number is displayed in the center of the screen, the expected number of prize balls added with the additional number is additionally displayed. In the large addition pattern 1, it is specified that the additional number is not displayed in the 1R (see FIG. 12). In the 1R, only the initial value “240” is displayed in the display field 705 and the center of the screen is displayed. No added number is displayed in. Further, in the display field 706, basically, the "additional specialized zone" is displayed from the 1st R to the 7th R, and the "prize sphere increasing zone" is displayed from the 8R onward. As a result, the “additional specialized zone” is displayed in the first-R display field 706. Note that, as will be described later with reference to FIGS. 43 and 44, the “additional bonus” may be simply displayed instead of the “prize sphere increasing zone” in the display field 706 after the eighth round. The “additional specialized zone” displayed in the display field 706 indicates that the addition display of the planned prize balls is performed with high probability. The "prize sphere addition zone" displayed in the display column 706 indicates that a round game in which an over-winning is expected can be expected. The "additional bonus" displayed in the display field 706 indicates that a round game in which an over-winning due to the additional bonus cannot be expected is being played. The "add-on bonus" image 700 displayed at the top of the display area 4A indicates the start of the add-on bonus.

Next, as shown in FIG. 42(C), when the 2Rth is started, it is stipulated that the additional number "30" is displayed in the 2Rth large addition pattern 1 (see FIG. 12). In the center of the screen of the display area 4A, after the additional character 702A is displayed, the additional number 703A of "+30" is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 42(D), when the 3rd round is started, the display column 705 adds the added number 703A of “+30” displayed in the previous round to the planned number of prize balls “270”. Is added and displayed. Further, in the large addition pattern 1, it is specified that the additional number is not displayed on the 3R (see FIG. 12), and the additional character 702A and the additional number are not displayed in the center of the screen on the 3R.

Next, as shown in FIG. 42(E), when the 4th R is started, it is stipulated in the large additional pattern 1 that the additional number “105” is displayed on the 4th R (see FIG. 12). In the center of the screen of the display area 4A, after the additional character 702A is displayed, the additional number 703B of "+105" is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 42(F), when the 5th round is started, the display column 705 adds the added number 703B of “+105” displayed in the previous round to the planned prize ball number “375”. Is added and displayed. Further, in the large additional pattern 1, it is specified that the additional number is not displayed on the 5R (see FIG. 12), and the additional character 702A and the additional number are not displayed at the center of the screen on the 5R.

Next, as shown in FIG. 42(G), when the sixth round is started, the planned prize ball number “375” which is the same as that in the previous round is continuously displayed in the display field 705. Further, in the large addition pattern 1, it is specified that the additional number is not displayed on the 6R (see FIG. 12). Therefore, on the 6R, the additional character 702A and the additional number are not displayed in the center of the screen.

Next, as shown in FIG. 42(H), when the 7Rth is started, it is stipulated in the large addition pattern 1 that the additional number “270” is displayed on the 7Rth (see FIG. 12). In the center of the screen of the display area 4A, after the additional character 702A is displayed, the additional number 703C of "+270" is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 42(I), when the 8th round is started, the planned prize ball number “645” is added to the display field 705 by adding the additional number 703C of “+270” displayed in the previous round. Is added and displayed. Further, as shown in FIGS. 42(I) and 42(J), a “prize ball increasing zone” is displayed in the display field 706 of the 8th to 16th eyes. Further, in the large addition pattern 1, since it is specified that the additional number is not displayed for the 8Rth to 16Rth (see FIG. 12), the additional character 702A and the additional number are added to the center of the screen in the 8Rth to 16Rth. Instead of being displayed, the display field 705 displays that the planned number of prize balls has finally reached “645”. With such a series of displays of the number of additions and the planned number of prize balls, the player cannot substantially generate an over-winning in the first half round, but the estimated number of prize balls displayed additionally is used as a guide in the second half round. It is possible to proceed with the game while expecting the over-winning, and it is possible to enhance the interest of the game as well as the effect of production.

Further, as shown in FIG. 43(A), when the small additional bonus 2 corresponding to the hit pattern 6 is determined as the additional bonus and the small additional pattern 5 is selected as the additional pattern, the display area 4A of the hit start interval is displayed. An image 700 indicating the start of the bonus to be added is displayed on the screen, and an image 701 for prompting a right hit is also displayed. At this time, the added character 702B, for example, "animal" selected by lottery appears on the screen, and thereafter, an image 703 showing the initial value "+240" of the planned number of prize balls is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 43(B), when the first round is started, display fields 704 to 706 are displayed on the screen of the display area 4A. In the 1st R, the display field 704 displays “animal” corresponding to the added character 702B. Even in the small additional pattern 5, it is specified that the additional number is not displayed in the 1R (see FIG. 12). In the 1R, only the initial value “240” is displayed in the display field 705. No extra number is displayed in the center.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 43B and 43C, the “additional specialized zone” is displayed in the display field 706 of the first to seventh Rs. Further, in the small additional pattern 5, it is specified that the additional number is not displayed for the 1R to 7R eyes (see FIG. 12 ). Instead of being displayed, the planned prize ball number is continuously displayed in the display field 705 without changing from the initial value “240”.

After that, as shown in FIG. 43(D), when the 8th round is started, the “additional bonus” is displayed in the display field 706. In addition, in the small addition pattern 5, since the addition number "135" is specified to be displayed on the 8R (see FIG. 12), after the addition character 702B is displayed in the center of the screen of the display area 4A. , "+135" added number 703D is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 43(E), when the 9th round is started, the display field 706 displays a “prize sphere increasing zone”. Further, in the display field 705, the planned prize ball number “375” obtained by adding the addition number 703D of “+135” displayed in the previous round is additionally displayed. Further, in the small addition pattern 5, since it is specified that the additional number is not displayed after the 9th round (see FIG. 12), the additional character 702A and the additional number are not displayed in the center of the screen after the 9th round, In the display field 705, it is displayed that the planned number of prize balls is finally “375”. Even with such a series of displays of the number of additions and the number of planned prize balls, the player cannot substantially generate an over-winning until a part of the second half round (1st to 13th rounds), but is additionally displayed. It is possible to proceed with the game while expecting an over-winning until the final round (16R) with the planned number of prize balls as a guide, and it is possible to enhance the interest of the game as well as the effect of production.

Further, as shown in FIG. 44(A), when the no-add-on bonus according to the hit pattern 7 is determined as the add-on bonus and the no-add-on pattern 1 is selected as the add-on pattern, the screen of the display area 4A in the hit start interval is displayed. An image 700 showing the start of the bonus to be added is displayed on the top, and an image 701 for prompting a right hit is also displayed. At this time, an additional character 702C, for example, "female" selected by lottery appears on the screen, and thereafter, an image 703 showing the initial value "+240" of the planned number of prize balls is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 44(B), when the first round is started, display fields 704 to 706 are displayed on the screen of the display area 4A. In this 1R, in the display field 704, “female” corresponding to the added character 702C is displayed. In the no-addition pattern 1, it is specified that the number of additions is not displayed in all rounds including the 1st round (see FIG. 12). In the 1st round, the initial value “240” is displayed in the display field 705. The extra number is not displayed in the center of the screen.

That is, as shown in FIGS. 44(B) to (D), in the 1R to 16R, the additional character 702B and the additional number are not displayed in the center of the screen, and the planned prize ball number is initially displayed in the display field 705. It is continuously displayed without changing from the value “240”. As shown in FIGS. 44(C) and 44(D), the “additional bonus” is simply displayed in the display field 706 from the 8th round onward.

The additional character may be made to appear in response to the operation of the effect button, and the number of additional characters may be displayed after the appearance. Further, the additional character appearing after the 8th round and the additional character appearing before the 7th round may have the same person but different appearances. As a numerical value to be displayed, when a game ball is won in the special winning opening, “+15” corresponding to the number of prize balls may be displayed, and the number of payouts or the planned number of payouts may be cumulatively displayed. Further, the expected number of prize balls may be indirectly indicated by, for example, light or sound, instead of directly displaying the estimated numerical value. In the "Additional bonus", the addition display of the planned prize balls is displayed in the round following the round in which the addition number is displayed, but the addition display of the planned prize balls and the addition number are displayed in the same round. The above may be performed, or the expected number of prize balls may be added and displayed in each round subsequent to the round in which the additional number is displayed.

[Effects of the gaming machine of the first embodiment]
According to the pachinko gaming machine of the first embodiment, the following effects can be obtained.

According to the pachinko gaming machine of the present embodiment, during the interval time between rounds when the special winning opening 37 is closed, the number of game balls exceeding the specified winning number in the next round game is suppressed by the suppression unit 430 (large winning opening shutter. It is controlled so that it is time to flow into the upper surface of 37A). Specifically, in the interval patterns b to d, the time is controlled such that two or more game balls can pass through the upper surface of the special winning opening shutter 37A at the same time. As a result, when the special winning opening shutter 37A is opened from the closed state of the interval between rounds in response to the start of the round game, the number of game balls that is larger than the specified winning number flowing into the special winning opening shutter 37A in the closed state. Is led to the big winning opening 37, it is possible to realize an over-winning in a predetermined round game, and it is possible to enhance the interest in the big hit game state.

Further, without changing the opening time of the special winning opening shutter 37A, by appropriately controlling the time between rounds in which the special winning opening 37 is closed between desired round games, The number of over-winning prizes can be adjusted appropriately. That is, specifically, for the inter-round interval, the big hit game state of the hit pattern 7 which is a relatively short time (interval pattern a) and the hit pattern 2 which is a longer time (interval pattern b to d). By providing 6 big hit game states, the number of prize balls awarded based on over-winning can be made different according to the time of the interval between rounds, and a difference in these advantage degrees for a plurality of big hit game states. Can be attached.

In addition, the number of prize balls that are awarded each time a game ball is won in the special winning opening 37, the number of times the round game is executed, and the over-winning prize that will be won in the special winning opening 37 according to the interval time between rounds. Based on the estimated number of prizes including the number, the planned number of prize balls in the big hit game state can be calculated in advance, and the planned number of prize balls can be reported as an added number or an initial value. As to whether or not the number of prize balls can be obtained, it is possible to give notification of novel contents rich in surprisingness and variety, and it is possible to enhance the interest in the jackpot gaming state.

In the first embodiment, basically, the over-winning is realized by adjusting the time between the rounds after the 7th round, but, for example, by making the time of the hit start interval relatively long. You may make it possible to over-win from the first round.

<Second Embodiment>
Next, a second embodiment of the invention will be described with reference to FIGS. The same or similar components as those of the first embodiment described above are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

[Specifications of game machines]
First, the specifications of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 45, the jackpot probability of the special symbol that is in the jackpot gaming state is 1/399.60 (164/65536) in the low probability time (non-probability variation game state), and the high probability (probability variation game state). ), it is 1/1350.54 (502/65536). The small hit probability of the special symbol which becomes the small hit game state is 1/299.25 (219/65536) in both the first special symbol and the second special symbol. As for the digestion order of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the lottery by the second special symbol is preferentially digested. As the probability variation performance (specification of the probability variation gaming state), the ST gaming state in which the probability variation gaming state continues up to 180 times is implemented.

The distribution of special symbols is as follows. In the first special symbol big hit symbol "probability variation 1", it becomes a hit pattern 1 and 16R is given as the number of rounds of the round game (of which the actual number of rounds that easily wins the big winning award is 7R), and a big hit game state production mode. The bonus name shown is “normal bonus” and the bonus content is “7R bonus”. As for this “normal bonus”, the estimated number of winnings in the first to seventh Rs is 10 and the number of estimated winnings in the eighth to sixteenth is 0 for the winning in the special winning opening 37. As a result, in the "normal bonus", the planned number of prize balls is 1050. The probability (rush rate) to be "probability variation 1" as a big hit symbol of the first special symbol is set to 100/100.

In the special jackpot pattern "probability variation 1" of the second special symbol, the winning pattern is 2, the number of rounds 16R (the number of actual rounds is also 16R) is given, the bonus name is "Large extra bonus", and the bonus content is "Large extra bonus" It is a "bonus". In this "great addition bonus", the estimated number of prizes at the 1R to 7R is 10 and the estimated number of prizes at the 8R to 16R is 12. As a result, in the "great addition bonus", the planned number of prize balls is 2670. The probability (rush rate) to be "probability variation 1" as the big hit symbol of the second special symbol is set to 50/100.

In the second special symbol big hit symbol "probability variation 2", the hit pattern 3 is given, the number of rounds 16R (the actual number of rounds is also 16R) is given, the bonus name is "medium additional bonus 1", and the bonus content is "medium". The bonus is 1". In the "middle-up bonus 1", the estimated number of prizes for the first to seventh R is 10 and the estimated number of prizes for the eighth to 16R is 11. As a result, in the "middle and upper bonus 1", the planned number of prize balls is 2535. The probability (rush rate) to be "probability change 2" as a big hit symbol of the second special symbol is set to 10/100.

In the second special symbol big hit symbol "probability variation 3", it becomes a hit pattern 4 and the number of rounds 16R (the actual number of rounds is also 16R) is given, and the bonus name is "medium additional bonus 2" and the bonus content is "medium". The bonus is 2". The “middle-up bonus 2” has an estimated number of prizes of 1R to 11R of 10, an estimated number of prizes of 12R is 11, and an estimated number of prizes of 13R to 16R is 12. As a result, in the "middle and upper bonus 2", the planned number of prize balls is 2535. The probability (rush rate) to be "probability variation 3" as the big hit symbol of the second special symbol is set to 5/100.

In the special jackpot pattern "Probability Variation 4" of the second special symbol, the winning pattern is 5, the number of rounds 16R (the number of actual rounds is also 16R) is given, the bonus name is "Small bonus", and the bonus content is "Small bonus". It is a "bonus". The "small bonus bonus 1" has an estimated number of prizes of 10 from the first to 16th rounds. As a result, in the "small addition bonus", the planned number of prize balls is 2400. The probability (rush rate) to be "probability variation 4" as a big hit symbol of the second special symbol is set to 35/100.

The small hit has the same content as the small hit according to the first embodiment described above except that the hit pattern 6 corresponds.

The special winning hole count number corresponds to the specified winning number that triggers the end of one round game, and in the present embodiment, the special winning hole count number (specified winning number) is set to "10". That is, when 10 winnings to the special winning opening 37 are counted in one round, the round is finished. Also in the present embodiment, the number of special winning openings (regulated number of winnings) does not set the upper limit of the number of winnings in one round. That is, even if, for example, winnings exceeding the number of large winning a prize holes are detected in one round, the number of prize balls corresponding to the number of winnings is paid out. As a result, it is possible to over-win the winning number exceeding the winning prize count. This point will be described later.

The time saving performance, the number of prize balls corresponding to the starting opening and each winning opening, the winning probability of the ordinary symbol, the number of winning symbols of the ordinary symbol, and the second starting opening winning count are the same as those of the first embodiment.

The specifications of the present embodiment may also have the following contents. For example, with regard to the special symbols, the jackpot probability at the time of low probability and at the time of high probability is not limited to the above. In other words, the big hit probability of the special symbol may be a probability that the high hit probability is more likely to win the big hit than the low probability hit. The small hit probability is not limited to the above. For example, the specification may be such that the winning probability in one special symbol is higher than that in the other special symbol. Regarding the digestion order of the special symbols, the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be set in the winning order without setting the priority order, or may be the specification of preferentially digesting the first special symbol. The number of STs in which the probability variation gaming state (ST gaming state) continues is not limited to that described above. The probability variation game state may be continued until the next big hit. The number of rounds is not limited to that described above, and a number of rounds other than 16R may be provided. The actual number of rounds may be the same as the number of regular rounds. The types of big hit symbols are not limited to those described above. For example, you may increase the number of types of big hit symbols of the first special symbol. Further, even in the big hit game state based on the first special symbol, the additional bonus may be executed. In the present embodiment, the special winning opening count number (specified winning number) is set to “10”, but the number is not limited to this. For example, the special winning opening count number may be set to 11 or more or less than 9. The time saving performance may be greater than the number of STs (the number of games in the probability variation game state), or may be less than the number of STs including 0 times. The number of prize balls is not limited to the above. For example, when the number of prize balls related to the special winning opening is set to a value different from the above value, the expected number of prize balls is calculated using the value and the estimated number of prizes, and the number of additional balls to be described later is notified. You can As for the ordinary symbols, the winning probability at the time of low probability and at the time of high probability is not limited to the above. For example, the winning probability of a normal symbol may be a probability that the high probability is easier to win than the low probability, and for example, the low probability may be won. The number of normal symbols is not limited to the above number, and may be two or more, for example. In the case of two or more blades, it is preferable that the opening patterns of the blade members are associated with each other differently. The second starting opening winning count may be a value other than the above.

[1 round open/close pattern]
Next, the opening/closing pattern of the special winning opening in one round will be described with reference to FIG.

As shown in FIG. 46, five types of opening/closing patterns A to E are defined as one-round opening/closing patterns of the special winning opening 37. The open/close patterns A to E are open/close patterns corresponding to the big hit game state, and the open/close pattern E among them is the open/close pattern corresponding to the small hit game state. The open/close pattern A and the open/close pattern E of the present embodiment are the same as the open/close pattern A and the open/close pattern C of the first embodiment, but the open/close patterns B to D of the present embodiment are different from those of the first embodiment. Differently, it is regulated to be in an open state a plurality of times (twice in the present embodiment) in one round game.

The open/close pattern B is an open/close pattern in which the open state first becomes 5.21 s, then the closed state becomes 2.64 s, and then the open state becomes 3.00 s and finally becomes the closed state. In the opening/closing pattern B, the period from the first opening to the final closing is defined as a round section. The section in which the open state is 5.21 s or 3.00 s is shorter than the long open of the opening/closing pattern A and therefore corresponds to the middle open. A section that is in the closed state for 2.64 s between the two middle openings is referred to as “inter-round interval” in the following description. That is, in the opening/closing pattern B, two middle releases occur at intervals during the round, and the total opening time of the opening/closing pattern B is 8.21 s.

The open/close pattern C is an open/close pattern in which the open state first becomes 5.21 s, then the closed state becomes 1.98 s, and then the open state becomes 3.00 s and finally becomes the closed state. The open/close pattern C is also defined as a round section from the first open state to the final closed state. In the opening/closing pattern C as well, the middle opening occurs twice between the round in-between intervals, but the in-round interval time is shorter than that in the opening/closing pattern B. The total opening time of the opening/closing pattern C is 8.21 s, which is the same as the opening/closing pattern B.

The open/close pattern D is an open/close pattern in which the open state first becomes 5.21 s, then the closed state becomes 1.32 s, and then the open state becomes 3.00 s and finally becomes the closed state. The open/close pattern D is also defined as a round section from the first open state to the final closed state. In the opening/closing pattern D as well, the middle opening is performed twice between the round intervals, but the opening interval time in the round is shorter than that in the opening/closing pattern C. The total opening time of the opening/closing pattern D is 8.21 s, which is the same as the opening/closing pattern B and the opening/closing pattern C.

The substantial round game in the big hit game state is a round game when the opening and closing is controlled based on the opening and closing patterns A to E among the above-described opening and closing patterns A to E including the long opening or the middle opening in which the game ball can be won. Applicable The round game when the opening/closing is controlled based on the opening/closing pattern E is a non-substantial round game that does not correspond to the substantive round game.

The opening/closing pattern for one round may have the following contents. The opening patterns are not limited to the above five types, and may be four types or less or six types or more. For the opening/closing pattern A, the opening time may be, for example, less than 10 s or more than 10 s instead of 10 s, as long as a predetermined number of game balls can be won. Further, in the present embodiment, in the case of the opening/closing patterns B to D, the opening is made twice in one round, but the opening may be made three times or more. The middle opening time in the opening/closing patterns B to D may be any time that allows a predetermined number of game balls to win. Further, regarding the opening/closing patterns B to D, the middle opening time may be different from each other. The opening time of the middle opening can be appropriately set according to the time between the round intervals and the round interval. For the opening/closing pattern E, the opening time may be, for example, less than 0.1 s or more than 0.1 s instead of 0.1 s. Further, instead of opening only once in one round, it may be opened plural times.

[Prize winning opening/closing pattern (hit pattern) and interval between rounds]
Next, the big winning opening opening/closing pattern (hit pattern) and the interval between rounds in the big hit game state and the small hit game state will be described with reference to FIG. 47.

As shown in FIG. 47, as the special winning opening opening/closing pattern (hit pattern), a plurality of hit patterns 1 to 6 are defined. As the inter-round interval pattern, only the interval pattern a whose closing time is 0.3 s is defined. The hit pattern 1 is a hit pattern that is generated in the normal bonus and has a prescribed round number of 16R and an actual round number of 7R. The winning pattern 1 is defined such that the special winning opening 37 becomes the opening/closing pattern A in the first to seventh rounds, and the big winning opening 37 becomes the opening/closing pattern E in the eighth to 16th rounds. That is, the hit pattern 1 defines that the substantial rounds are the seven rounds of the first to seventh rounds, and the remaining nine rounds of the eighth to sixteenth rounds are executed as the non-substantial rounds.

The hit pattern 2 is a hit pattern that occurs when a large bonus is added and the specified round number and the actual round number are defined as 16R. The winning pattern 2 is defined such that the special winning opening 37 becomes the opening/closing pattern A in the first to seventh rounds, and the big winning opening 37 becomes the opening/closing pattern B in the eighth to 16th rounds. In the large addition bonus that is executed as an effect together with the hit pattern 2, the number of prize balls based on only the number of special winning openings (specified prize number: 10) is 2400. It becomes 2670. Therefore, in the large addition bonus, "2100" corresponding to the number of prize balls for 14 rounds is notified as an initial value, and the number "570" corresponding to the difference between this initial value and the planned number of prize balls is added in the first half round. It will be announced as a number.

The hit pattern 3 is a hit pattern that occurs at the time of the middle-up bonus 1, and the specified round number and the actual round number are defined as 16R. The winning pattern 3 is defined such that the special winning opening 37 becomes the opening/closing pattern A in the first to seventh rounds, and the big winning opening 37 becomes the opening/closing pattern C in the eighth to 16th rounds. In the medium addition bonus 1 which is executed as an effect together with the hit pattern 3, the number of prize balls based on the specified number of prizes is 2400, but the expected number of prize balls is 2535 including the over prize. Therefore, also in the middle-up bonus 1, "2100" corresponding to the number of prize balls for 14 rounds is notified as an initial value, and "435" corresponding to the difference between this initial value and the planned number of prize balls is calculated in the first half round. It will be reported as an additional number.

The hit pattern 4 is a hit pattern that occurs at the time of the middle-up bonus 2, and the specified round number and the actual round number are defined as 16R. In the hit pattern 4, the special winning opening 37 becomes the opening/closing pattern A in the 1st to 7th rounds, the big winning opening 37 becomes the opening/closing pattern D in the 8th to 11th rounds, and the big winning in the 12th round. It is defined that the mouth 37 becomes the opening/closing pattern C, and the special winning opening 37 becomes the opening/closing pattern B in the 13th to 16th rounds. In the medium addition bonus 2 which is executed as an effect together with the hit pattern 4, the number of prize balls based on the specified number of prizes is 2400, but the number of planned prize balls is 2535 when the over prize is included. Therefore, in the middle-up bonus 2, "2100" corresponding to the number of prize balls for 14 rounds is notified as an initial value, and "435" corresponding to the difference between this initial value and the planned number of prize balls is in the first half round or In the latter half of the round, it will be announced as an additional number.

The hit pattern 5 is a hit pattern that occurs when a small bonus is added and the specified round number and the actual round number are defined as 16R. The winning pattern 5 is defined such that the special winning opening 37 becomes the opening/closing pattern A in the first to seventh rounds, and the big winning opening 37 becomes the opening/closing pattern D in the eighth to 16th rounds. In the small addition bonus executed as an effect together with the winning pattern 5, the number of prize balls based on the specified number of winnings is 2400, and the over-winning is not detected. That is, the planned number of prize balls is also 2400. Therefore, in the small addition bonus, "2100" corresponding to the number of prize balls for 14 rounds is notified as an initial value, and "300" corresponding to the difference between this initial value and the planned number of prize balls is added in the first half round. It is reported as a number.

The hit pattern 6 is defined to occur during the small hit game state, and the special winning opening 37 becomes the opening/closing pattern E only once. That is, the winning pattern 6 is executed as a winning pattern in which the winning probability of the game ball to the special winning opening 37 is extremely low.

The winning pattern may have the following contents. In the present embodiment, as will be described later, on the premise that the game balls are continuously fired, the open/close patterns B to D are set to the in-round intervals. You may specify the time of the interval during a round as a standard. For example, as the time during the round, the time corresponding to a predetermined number of assumed maximum arrival times based on the time of the first opening of the middle and the start time of the firing operation may be defined. Also, when it is difficult for over-winning to occur, the time in the round interval that corresponds to this is the number of prizes during the round (the number of prizes detected with the first open state) and the interval during the round. It is preferable to set a time such that the total number of game balls assumed to be present on the winning opening shutter is equal to or less than the specified winning number, and in a situation where over-winning is likely to occur, an interval during a round corresponding to this The time of is the total of the number of winning prizes during the round (the number of winning prizes detected in the first open state) and the number of game balls that are assumed to be on the special winning opening shutter in the interval during the round. It is preferable to set the time so as to exceed. As a result, it is possible to generate a situation in which over-winning is easy and a situation in which it is difficult to over-win according to the interval time during the round. For example, in the present embodiment, 2.64 s, which is the maximum time of the round interval, is defined as the time that can achieve 12 prizes per round (2 over prizes), but 13 prizes per round. It may be a time when the above winnings are possible. However, as the number of over-winning prizes increases, the interval time during the round tends to be unnaturally long, so it is preferable to set an appropriate time. The hit pattern 1 may be the same opening/closing pattern assigned to all of the rounds, or the opening/closing pattern may be different only in some rounds. The hit pattern may have different intervals between rounds. The hit patterns 2 to 5 may have different opening/closing patterns in some or all of the rounds. Further, in the hit patterns 2 to 5, some intervals between rounds may be different.

[Additional pattern selection table]
FIG. 48 is a diagram showing an additional pattern selection table. The additional pattern selection table is a table referred to in a hit effect pattern determination process (see FIG. 55) of the sub CPU 71 described later. The additional pattern selection table is a table for selecting an additional pattern as a hit effect pattern, which will be described later, according to the hit patterns 2 to 5. The additional pattern selection table is provided for each of the winning patterns 2 to 5, and defines various additional patterns to be determined and a selection rate (%) when selecting the additional pattern by lottery.

According to the additional pattern selection table (hit pattern 2) associated with the winning pattern 2, the large additional patterns 1 to 4 are selected at a predetermined selection rate as the additional patterns corresponding to the large bonus. According to the addition pattern selection table (hit pattern 3) associated with the hit pattern 3, the middle addition patterns 1 to 4 are selected at a predetermined selection rate as the additional patterns corresponding to the middle addition bonus 1. According to the addition pattern selection table (hit pattern 4) associated with the hit pattern 4, the middle addition patterns 5 to 9 are selected at a predetermined selection rate as the additional patterns corresponding to the middle addition bonus 2. According to the addition pattern selection table (hit pattern 5) associated with the hit pattern 5, the small addition patterns 1 to 4 are selected at a predetermined selection rate as the addition patterns corresponding to the small addition bonus.

It should be noted that the selection rate for allocating the additional pattern, which is a decision item in the additional pattern selection table, is not limited to that shown in FIG. In the additional pattern selection table, the number of additional patterns may be the same or may be different.

[Additional pattern table]
FIG. 49 is a diagram showing an additional pattern table. The additional pattern table is a table referred to in the above-described sub CPU 71 production effect during a round (see FIG. 37). The additional pattern table is a table for defining the number of additional effects for performance and the round in which the notification is performed according to the additional pattern. The additional pattern table is provided for each type of bonus, and defines the additional pattern and the number of rounds which are reference items, and the additional number which is a decision item. Also in this embodiment, the number of additional characters is notified when the additional character described later appears.

According to the additional pattern table (large additional bonus) corresponding to the large additional bonus, the number of rounds and the additional number to be notified are defined for each of the large additional patterns 1 to 4 as the additional pattern. For example, in the large addition pattern 1, “100” is notified as the addition number in each of the 1R, 3R, and 5R, and “270” is notified as the addition number in the 7R. The total number of additions is “570”.

According to the add-on pattern table corresponding to the add-on middle 1 (add-on bonus 1), the number of rounds and the add-on number to be notified are defined for each of the add-on patterns 1 to 4 as add-on patterns. For example, in the medium addition pattern 1, "100" is notified as the addition number in each of the 1R, 3R, and 5R, and "135" is notified as the addition number in the 7R. The total number of additions is “435”.

According to the add-on pattern table corresponding to the add-on bonus 2 (add-on bonus 2), the number of rounds and the add-on number to be notified are defined for each of the add-on patterns 5 to 9 as add-on patterns. For example, in the medium-up pattern 5, “100” is reported as the number of additions in each of the first, third, and fifth Rs, “30” is reported as the number of additions in each of the eighth to tenth, and the eleventh is added. “45” is reported as the number of additions. The total number of additions is “435”.

According to the small addition pattern table (small addition bonus) corresponding to the small addition bonus, the number of rounds and the added number to be notified are defined for each of the small addition patterns 1 to 4 as the addition pattern. For example, in the small addition pattern 1, "100" is notified as the number of additions in each of the 1R, 3R, and 5R. The total number of additions is “300”.

It should be noted that the numerical values for allocating the additional numbers in the additional pattern table are not limited to those shown in FIG. 49, and the additional numbers (570, 435, 300) obtained from the difference between the planned number of prize balls and the initial value may be appropriately distributed. do it. In addition, after a numerical value that exceeds the total number of additions is notified as an additional number, by setting a numerical value to be notified so as to be subtracted, the final total number of additions may be set. ..

[Additional character lottery table]
FIG. 50 is a diagram showing an additional character lottery table. The additional character lottery table is a table referred to in a hit effect pattern determination process (see FIG. 55) of the sub CPU 71 described later. The additional character lottery table is a table for selecting an additional character to be made to appear at the time of starting the additional bonus or informing the number of additional characters according to the additional pattern by lottery. The additional character lottery table defines various additional patterns that are reference items, additional characters that are decisions, and selection rates (%) when selecting additional characters by lottery. As the characters to be added, "animal", "female", and "fireworks" are defined.

For example, in the large addition patterns 1 to 4, it is defined that the selection rate of the addition character of “fireworks” is the highest. In the middle-up patterns 1 to 9, it is specified that the selection rates of the "female" and "fireworks" additional characters are generally high, and the selection rates of the "animal" additional characters are generally low. In the small addition patterns 1 to 4, the selection ratio of the addition character of "animal" is high, the selection ratio of the addition character of "female" is high, and the selection ratio of the addition character of "fireworks" is generally low. It is prescribed. According to the additional character that appears based on such an additional character lottery table, the type of bonus is suggested, and the expectation for the prize ball is also increased from the additional number that is notified at the same time when the additional character appears. be able to.

The selection rate for allocating the additional character in the additional character lottery table is not limited to that shown in FIG. For various types of additional characters, additional patterns that cannot be selected may be defined. For example, it is assumed that the additional character of "animal" cannot be selected only in the large additional pattern, and the additional character of "fireworks" can be selected only in the middle additional pattern or the large additional pattern. May be.

[Control by main CPU and sub CPU]
Next, the processing executed by the main CPU 61 and the sub CPU 71 will be described below with reference to FIGS. Regarding the same processing as that of the first embodiment, only the drawing numbers and step numbers are appropriately described, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

As the processing of the main CPU 61 in the present embodiment, main processing, timer interrupt processing, switch input processing, special symbol related switch check processing, first starting opening switch check processing, second starting opening switch checking processing, special winning opening switch Check process, special symbol control process, special symbol memory check process, special symbol determination process, special symbol variation time management process, special symbol display time management process, special symbol game end process, FIGS. 14 to 26 according to the first embodiment, Since it is similar to that shown in FIG. 31, its description is omitted.

[Hit start interval management processing]
FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing a hit start interval management process executed by the main CPU 61. The hit start interval management process is the same as S200 to S210 shown in FIG. 27 according to the first embodiment, and processes S350 to S360. In the present embodiment, in S360, the main CPU 61 sets the data corresponding to any of the opening/closing patterns A to E as the special winning opening opening data.

[Waiting management process before re-opening the big winning a prize]
FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing the waiting time management process before the special winning opening reopening executed by the main CPU 61. This special winning opening re-opening waiting time question management processing performs processing of S370 to S377 as processing similar to S220 to S227 shown in FIG. 28 according to the first embodiment. In this embodiment, in S377, the main CPU 61 sets the data corresponding to any of the opening/closing patterns A to E as the special winning opening opening data.

[Processing during opening of the special winning opening]
FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing the special winning opening opening process executed by the main CPU 61. The processing during the opening of the special winning opening performs the processing of S380 to S392, which is substantially the same as the processing of S230 to S242 shown in FIG. 29 according to the first embodiment. In this embodiment, the processing of S381, S382, and S387 is as follows.

In S381, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not the value of the special winning opening prize counter is “10” or more. In this process, when determining that the value of the special winning opening prize counter is "10" or more, the main CPU 61 shifts the process to S384. On the other hand, the main CPU 61 shifts the processing to S382 when determining that the value of the special winning opening prize counter is not “10” or more.

In S382, the main CPU 61 executes a special winning opening opening/closing process according to the opening/closing pattern for each set round in the type of big hit and the current round. According to this processing, when the open/close patterns B to D are set, the in-round interval that is in the closed state occurs during the round. As a result, over-winning in which the actual number of winnings is larger than the specified number of winnings is realized by using the interval during the round. In S382, the special winning opening opening/closing processing corresponding to the opening/closing pattern corresponding to the small hit is also executed.

In S387, the main CPU 61 performs processing for setting the value of the waiting time timer as the inter-round interval display time in the main RAM 63. In this embodiment, the inter-round interval display time is always set to the time corresponding to the interval pattern a.

[Hit end interval management processing]
FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing the hit end interval management processing executed by the main CPU 61. The hit end interval management processing is substantially the same as S250 to S256 shown in FIG. 30 according to the first embodiment, and the processing of S400 to S406 is performed. However, in S405, the main CPU 61 is configured to set the value of the probability variation counter of the main RAM 63 to "180" as the ST number.

As the processing of the sub CPU 71 in the present embodiment, a main processing, a command reception interruption processing, a timer interruption processing, a command analysis processing, and a during-round effect processing are shown in FIGS. 32 to 35 and FIG. 37 according to the first embodiment. Since it is similar to the above, the description thereof is omitted.

[Hit effect pattern determination process]
FIG. 55 is a flowchart showing a hit effect pattern determination process executed by the sub CPU 71. This hit effect pattern determination process is the same as S320 to S328 shown in FIG. 36 according to the first embodiment, and is the same as S410 to S418. In this embodiment, the processing of S410, S411, S414, and S417 is as follows.

In S410, the sub CPU 71 executes a hit effect pattern type determination process. In this process, the sub CPU 71 sets one of "01H" to "06H" in the hit effect pattern flag according to the stop symbol designating information of the special symbol included in the received hit start display command. Regarding the hit effect pattern flag, "01H" corresponds to the normal bonus, "02H" to "05H" correspond to the large addition bonus, the middle addition bonus 1 and 2, and the small addition bonus, respectively, and "06H" is Corresponding to a small hit. When this process ends, the process moves to S411.

In S411, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether the value of the hit effect pattern flag is any of "02H" to "05H". That is, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not it is a bonus to be added, based on the value of the hit effect pattern flag. When it is determined that the value of the hit effect pattern flag is any of "02H" to "05H", the process is moved to S412. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the hit effect pattern flag is neither "02H" to "05H", the process proceeds to S418.

In S414, the sub CPU 71 performs processing for setting a value corresponding to the selected addition pattern to the addition pattern flag. In the present embodiment, 17 patterns are provided as additional patterns, and the large additional patterns 1 to 4, the medium additional patterns 1 to 9, and the small additional patterns 1 to 4 each include an additional pattern flag “01H” to “11H” corresponds. When this process ends, the process moves to S415.

In S417, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting "2100" in the prize ball number counter. The value "2100" corresponds to the number of prize balls to be paid out in accordance with 14R of the 16R round game, and is displayed as the initial value of the planned number of prize balls in the hit start interval. When this process ends, the hit effect pattern determination process routine ends.

[Winning finish production process]
FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing the hit end effect process executed by the sub CPU 71. The hit end effect process is the same as S340 to S344 shown in FIG. 38 according to the first embodiment, and steps S420 to S424 are performed. In this embodiment, the processing of S420 and S422 is as follows.

In S420, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the hit effect pattern flag is "02H" to "05H". That is, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the addition bonus has ended based on the value of the hit effect pattern flag. When it is determined that the value of the hit effect pattern flag is any of "02H" to "05H", the process is moved to S421. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the hit effect pattern flag is neither "02H" to "05H", the process proceeds to S422.

In S422, the sub CPU 71 performs processing for setting end effect data according to the value of the hit effect pattern flag. That is, the sub CPU 71 sets the effect data at the end of the round game. At this time, as the finish effect data, data of different effect contents is set depending on whether the bonus is a normal bonus, a bonus to be added, or a small hit. When this process ends, the process moves to S423.

[Operation example when over-winning occurs]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 57 to 59, an operation example when an over-winning occurs at the special winning opening 37 will be described.

57 and 58 are diagrams for explaining the operation of the special winning opening shutter 37A when an over-winning occurs. 57 and 58 schematically show the behavior from the inter-round interval immediately before the 7R in the large additional bonus to the 7R, and after the end of the 7R, the inter-round interval again to the 8R. Further, the game balls are continuously fired and reach the right end portion of the special winning opening shutter 37A (in the open state, the right end portion of the corresponding special winning opening 37) after 3.1 s have uniformly passed. . Each game ball is given an order such as (1), (2),... Or (1'), (2'),... ') are attached in order.

First, as shown in FIG. 57(A), the special winning opening shutter 37A closes the special winning opening 37 in the inter-round interval immediately before the start of the 7th round. The time between rounds is shorter than the time 0.66 s which is equivalent to the approximate firing interval at which the game ball first reaches the right end portion of the special winning opening shutter 37A after the special winning opening shutter 37A is closed (book. Since it is 0.3 s in the embodiment, the game ball has not reached the right end portion of the special winning opening shutter 37A.

Next, as shown in FIG. 57(B), when the time between rounds elapses, the 7th round starts, and the special winning opening shutter 37A opens the special winning opening 37 by retracting in the direction of the white arrow. State. Even at this time, the game ball has not reached the right end of the special winning opening 37.

Then, as shown in FIG. 57(C), for example, the game ball (1) fired at an interval between rounds is in the vicinity of the right end of the special winning opening 37 opened along the upper surface 43a of the cover member 43 (not shown). Will roll up to.

After that, as shown in FIG. 57(D), the game ball (1) passes through the opened special winning opening 37 and drops downward, and the special winning opening count switch 370 detects the winning. . That is, the first winning prize of the specified winning number "10" is detected. After that, the game balls (2) to (9) (not shown) pass through the special winning opening 37 at every firing interval of 0.66 s and fall downward, and the winning openings are sequentially detected by the special winning opening count switch 370. The Rukoto.

Then, as shown in FIG. 57(E), the next game ball (10) also passes through the opened special winning opening 37 and drops downward, and the big winning opening count switch 370 detects the winning. Will be done. As a result, when the winning corresponding to the end of the defined winning number "10" is detected, the seventh round is ended, and the inter-round interval before the start of the eighth round is started. At this time, approximately 9.8 s has elapsed from the start of the shooting operation of the game ball (1). The time of 9.8 s is 3.1 s for the first game ball (1) to reach a portion corresponding to the right end portion of the special winning opening shutter 37A, and this game ball (1) is the special winning opening count switch 370. It is calculated from the sum of the time 0.1 s detected by and the firing interval 0.66 s×10 as the time required to fire the 10 game balls (1) to (10). Therefore, in the seventh round, which is open for 10 s at the longest, the winning of 10 game balls (1) to (10) can be sufficiently detected.

Next, as shown in FIG. 58(F), when the inter-round interval is started again, the special winning opening shutter 37A projects in the direction of the white arrow to close the special winning opening 37 again. To do. At this time, since the interval between the game balls is 0.66 s, the next game ball (1') has reached the vicinity of the right end of the special winning opening 37 in the closed state.

Then, when the time interval 0.3 s between rounds elapses, the 8th R starts, and as shown in FIG. 37 is opened. At this point, the game ball (1') has reached the portion corresponding to the right end portion of the special winning opening shutter 37A, so the game ball (1') passes through the opened special winning opening 37. Then, it falls downward, and the special winning opening count switch 370 detects the winning.

Then, as shown in FIG. 58(H), the game balls (2′) to (7′) and the game ball (8′) not shown pass through the special winning opening 37 at every 0.66s of the firing interval. It drops downward, and the winning prizes are sequentially detected by the special winning opening count switch 370. The time at which this game ball (8') is detected is 0.26s when the first game ball (1') is detected by the special winning opening count switch 370, when counting from the start time of the 8th round, 7 By setting the time required for firing each of the game balls (2′) to (8′) to be the firing interval of 0.66 s×7, approximately 4.88 s have elapsed. That is, in the 8th round, the winning of approximately eight gaming balls (1') to (8') is detected within the time (5.21 s) when the first middle opening is performed.

In such an 8R, when the time of the first middle opening of 5.21 s elapses, as shown in FIG. 58(I), the special winning opening shutter 37A once opens the special winning opening 37 due to the interval during the round. Closed. Then, when 0.66 s has elapsed from the state of FIG. 58(H), that is, when approximately 5.54 s has elapsed from the time of starting the 8th R, the next game ball (9′) is the big winning opening shutter. Reach the right end of 37A.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 58(J), the special winning opening shutter 37A closes the special winning opening 37 until 2.64 seconds, which is the time defined as the interval during the eighth round, is elapsed. Meanwhile, on the upper surface of the special winning opening shutter 37A, the game balls (9') to (12') pass from the right side to the left side in a line. At this time, the game balls (9') to (12') sequentially reach the right end portion of the special winning opening shutter 37A approximately every 0.66 seconds, and roll at a speed of about 22 mm every 0.66 seconds. Move. As a result, the four game balls (9') to (12') are positioned on the upper surface of the special winning opening shutter 37A while being spaced apart by about one. In short, starting from the state time of FIG. 58(H), the state of FIG. 58(J) is after a lapse of approximately 2.64 s, and is a time point after a lapse of approximately 7.52 s from the start time of the 8th R. That is, in the eighth round interval, the four game balls (9') to (12') can be sufficiently present on the upper surface of the special winning opening shutter 37A by the end thereof.

Then, as shown in FIG. 58(K), when the 8R round interval ends, the second middle opening is performed, and the special winning opening shutter 37A retreats in the direction of the white arrow, and thereby the big winning opening 37. Is opened again. At this time, on the upper surface of the special winning opening shutter 37A, the game balls (9') to (12') are still passing at a relatively low speed. As a result, the four game balls (9′) to (12′) simultaneously pass through the opened special winning opening 37 and drop downward, and the four winning balls are counted by the special winning opening count switch 370. The winning of is detected. That is, eight winnings are detected in the first middle opening in one round game, and four winnings are detected in the middle opening immediately after the in-round interval in the same round game. As a result, an over-winning of more than the prescribed number of winnings of 10 will occur. Similarly, if the interval time during the round is set to 1.98 s, for example, 12+1 over-winnings will occur, and if it is 1.32s, over-winning will not occur.

FIG. 59 is a diagram for explaining various operation timings related to the special winning opening, and shows operation timings in the large addition bonus according to FIGS. 57 and 58. The "launch state", "gaming state", "required time", "special winning opening", "number of balls on the shutter", "elapsed time after the number of balls on the shutter", and "illustrated state" are the same as those described above. This is the same as the item indicated by 41.

As shown in FIG. 59, when the game balls are continuously fired, the time 7R is the time when the first game ball (1) is detected by the special winning opening count switch 370 from the start point of the 7R. 26s, the time required to fire the next nine game balls (2) to (10) is 0.66s×9=5.94s, and the last game ball (10) is the special winning opening count switch 370. Since the detected time is about 0.1 s, the total opening time is about 6.3 s, which is the total opening time.

After that, the interval between rounds after the end of the 7th round is started, and the special winning opening 37 is closed again. At this time, the special winning opening 37 is closed for 0.3 s, but the next game ball (1') has not yet reached the right end portion of the special winning opening shutter 37A, and the big winning opening shutter 37A. There is no game ball on the top of

Then, when the 8th R starts and the first middle opening starts, the winning of approximately eight gaming balls (1') to (8') is detected within the prescribed 5.21 s time. This is the time when the first game ball (1') is detected by the special winning opening count switch 370 from the start of the 8th R is about 0.26 s, and the next seven game balls (2) to ( Since the time required for the firing of 8) is the firing interval 0.66 s×7=4.62 s, it is also clear from the time which is the sum of these.

After that, the first middle opening ends and the 8R round interval starts. In the interval during this round, the special winning opening 37 is temporarily closed for 2.64 seconds. At this time, it takes about 0.33 s to reach the right end portion of the special winning opening shutter 37A from the start of the in-round interval to the next ninth game ball (9'), and the next three games. Since the time required to fire the balls (10′) to (12′) is 0.66 s×3=2.31 s, the four game balls (in the total time of 2.64 s) ( 9') to (12') are present on the upper surface of the special winning opening shutter 37A.

After that, when the interval during the 8th round is over and the special winning opening 37 is opened again by the second opening of the middle, the four gaming balls (9′) to () which are on the upper surface of the special winning opening shutter 37A. 12') passes through the special winning opening 37, and four winnings are detected. When the winning of one of the game balls is detected, the special winning opening 37 is closed, the eighth round is completed, and the next round interval is started. That is, as the opening and closing pattern of the 8th round, a maximum of 8 winnings can be detected at the first middle opening, and a maximum of 4 winnings can be detected at the second middle opening. The time is defined as 2.64 s, which allows 10+2 over-wins in the 8th round as a whole. Similarly, by setting the interval time during the round to 1.98 s, it is possible to over-win 10+1 pieces, and by setting the interval time during the round to 1.32 s, the over-win prize is not detected. There is. As described above, in the present embodiment, a maximum of two over-winnings are realized mainly by appropriately setting the time interval of the round, but three or more over-winnings may be possible. However, in the case where three or more over-wins are possible, the longitudinal dimension of the special winning opening shutter 37A is set to a length that allows at least four game balls to pass at the same time, or the time for opening the first middle is appropriately set. Preferably.

[Example of bonus screen display]
FIG. 60 is a diagram showing a screen display example of the additional bonus. This figure shows a screen display example of the additional bonus corresponding to the large additional pattern 1.

First, as shown in FIG. 60(A), when the large addition bonus according to the hit pattern 2 is determined as the addition bonus and the large addition pattern 1 is selected as the addition pattern, the screen of the display area 4A in the hit start interval is displayed. An image 700 indicating the start of the bonus to be added is displayed on the top, and an image 701 urging the player to hit the right is displayed. At this time, the added character 702A of, for example, "fireworks master" selected by lottery appears on the screen, and thereafter, an image 703 showing the initial value "+2100" of the planned number of prize balls is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 60(B), when the first round is started, a display field 704 indicating the type of character to be added on the screen of the display area 4A, the expected number of prize balls for each addition of the number of additions. Is displayed, and a display column 706 for displaying the period of the first half round as the “additional special zone” and the second half round as the “prize sphere increasing zone”. Such display fields 704 to 706 are displayed until the end of 16 rounds. For example, in the display field 704, "fireworks" corresponding to the additional character 702A is displayed until the end of 16 rounds. On the other hand, in the display field 705, after the additional number is displayed in the center of the screen, the expected number of prize balls added with the additional number is additionally displayed. In the large addition pattern 1, since the addition number "100" is specified to be displayed in the 1R (see FIG. 49), after the addition character 702A is displayed in the center of the screen of the display area 4A, " The additional number 703A of "+100" is displayed. Further, in the display field 706, basically, the "additional specialized zone" is displayed from the 1st R to the 7th R, and the "prize sphere increasing zone" is displayed from the 8R onward. As a result, the “additional specialized zone” is displayed in the first-R display field 706.

Next, as shown in FIG. 60(C), when the second round starts, the display field 705 adds the number 703A of additions of “+100” displayed in the previous round to the planned number of prize balls “2200”. Is added and displayed. In addition, in the large addition pattern 1, it is specified that the additional number is not displayed in the 2R (see FIG. 49), and in the 2R, the additional character 702A and the additional number are not displayed in the center of the screen.

Next, as shown in FIG. 60(D), when the 3rd round is started, it is stipulated in the large extra pattern 1 that the additional number “100” is displayed at the 3rd round (see FIG. 49). In the center of the screen of the display area 4A, after the additional character 702A is displayed, the additional number 703B of "+100" is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 60(E), when the 4th round is started, the planned prize ball number “2300” is added to the display field 705 by adding “+100” which is the number of additions 703B displayed in the previous round. Is added and displayed. Further, in the large additional pattern 1, it is specified that the additional number is not displayed at the 4R (see FIG. 49), and the additional character 702A and the additional number are not displayed at the center of the screen at the 4R.

Next, as shown in FIG. 60(F), when the 5th R is started, it is stipulated that the additional number "100" is displayed in the 5th R in the large additional pattern 1 (see FIG. 49). In the center of the screen of the display area 4A, after the additional character 702A is displayed, the additional number 703C of "+100" is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 60(G), when the 6th round is started, the display column 705 adds the added number 703C of “+100” displayed in the previous round to the planned prize ball number “2400”. Is added and displayed. In addition, in the large addition pattern 1, since the addition number is defined not to be displayed in the 6R (see FIG. 49), the addition character 702A and the addition number are not displayed in the center of the screen in the 6R.

Next, as shown in FIG. 60(H), when the 7th R is started, it is stipulated in the large addition pattern 1 that the additional number “270” is displayed on the 7th R (see FIG. 49). In the center of the screen of the display area 4A, after the additional character 702A is displayed, the additional number 703D of "+270" is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 60(I), when the 8th round is started, the display column 705 adds the addition number 703D of “+270” displayed in the previous round to the planned prize ball number “2670”. Is added and displayed. Further, as shown in FIGS. 60(I) and 60(J), a “prize sphere increasing zone” is displayed in the display field 706 of the 8th to 16th eyes. Further, in the large addition pattern 1, it is specified that the additional number is not displayed from the 8Rth to the 16Rth (see FIG. 49). Instead of being displayed, the display field 705 displays that the planned number of prize balls has finally reached “2670”. With such a series of displays of the number of additions and the planned number of prize balls, the player cannot substantially generate an over-winning in the first half round, but the estimated number of prize balls displayed additionally is used as a guide in the second half round. It is possible to proceed with the game while expecting the over-winning, and it is possible to enhance the interest of the game as well as the effect of production.

[Effects of the gaming machine of the second embodiment]
According to the pachinko gaming machine of the second embodiment, in addition to the same effects as those of the first embodiment, the following effects are also obtained.

In the pachinko gaming machine of the present embodiment, in a predetermined round game, the first middle opening time in which the special winning opening 37 is opened, the game balls less than the specified winning number (10) are shot, and the winning hole is given. The time required to pass through the shutter 37A is controlled to be the time when the winning is specifically detected for eight game balls, and then the special winning opening 37 is once closed. The time is controlled so that three or four game balls that are over-winning based on the previous eight balls flow into the suppressing unit 430 (the upper surface of the special winning opening shutter 37A). There is.

Thereby, in the round game, when the second middle opening is performed next time, a maximum of 12 game balls, which is larger than the specified winning number, is large from the upper surface of the big winning opening shutter 37A, including the case of the previous middle opening. You will be guided to the winning hole 37. Therefore, it is possible to realize an over-winning in a predetermined round game, and it is possible to enhance the interest in the big hit game state.

Also, in a predetermined round game, the special winning opening 37 is opened and closed multiple times, and the number of over-winning prizes is adjusted as appropriate by appropriately controlling the time during the round during which it is temporarily closed. can do.

In addition, as a round game in which over-winning is possible, for example, the opening/closing pattern D of a relatively short time is included in the time of the round interval without changing the time when the special winning opening shutter 37A is first opened to the middle. By providing a big hit game state of the hit pattern 5 and a big hit game state of the hit patterns 2 and 3 including the open/close pattern B and the open/close pattern C for a relatively long time, the number of over-winning prizes is increased according to the time of the round interval. The number of prize balls to be paid out can be made different, and the advantage degree can be made different simply by appropriately setting the time of the in-round interval for a plurality of big hit game states.

Also, according to the number of prize balls to be awarded each time a game ball wins in the special winning opening 37, the number of times the round game is executed, and further, the middle winning opening 37 and the big winning opening 37 are won. It is possible to pre-calculate the expected number of prize balls in the big hit game state based on the estimated number of prizes including the number of over-winning prizes, and to notify the estimated number of prize balls as the number of additions or the initial value. It is possible to inform about the number of prize balls to be obtained in a state with novel contents rich in surprisingness and variety, and it is possible to enhance the interest in the jackpot gaming state.

<Third Embodiment>
Next, a third embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS. The same or similar components as those of the first and second embodiments described above are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted. Further, the specifications of the gaming machine of the third embodiment are substantially the same as those of the gaming machine of the first embodiment, but no small hit is provided, the specified number of winnings is two, and the number of specified rounds is set to 3R. Has been done.

[1 round open/close pattern]
First, the opening/closing pattern of the special winning opening in one round will be described with reference to FIG. 61.

As shown in FIG. 61, three types of opening/closing patterns A to C are defined as one-round opening/closing patterns of the special winning opening 37. The open/close pattern A and the open/close pattern B of the present embodiment are the same as the open/close pattern A and the open/close pattern B of the first embodiment. The open/close pattern C of this embodiment is similar to the open/close pattern C of the second embodiment, but first the open state becomes 0.6 s, then the closed state becomes 1.98 s, and then the open state becomes 3.00 s. It is an opening/closing pattern that finally becomes a closed state after becoming. The opening/closing pattern C is also defined as a round section from the first open state to the final closed state. Such an opening/closing pattern C is a short opening first, and then a second opening occurs as a middle opening with an interval during a round. The total opening time of the opening/closing pattern C is 3.6 s. All the opening and closing patterns A to C described above correspond to the substantial round game in the big hit game state.

[Prize winning opening/closing pattern (hit pattern) and interval between rounds]
Next, with reference to FIG. 62, the special winning opening opening/closing pattern (hit pattern) and the interval between rounds in the big hit game state will be described.

As shown in FIG. 62, as the special winning opening opening/closing pattern (hit pattern), a plurality of hit patterns 1 to 4 are defined. As the inter-round interval pattern, an interval pattern a having a closing time of 0.3 s and an interval pattern b having a closing time of 2.97 s are defined. The hit pattern 1 corresponds to the bonus A to be added, and is a hit pattern in which the specified round number and the actual round number are 3R. In the hit pattern 1, all rounds 1R to 3R are open/close pattern A, and the intervals between rounds between 1R and 2R and between 2R and 3R are interval patterns a. It is prescribed. In such a hit pattern 1 (additional bonus A), two prizes equal to the specified number of prizes are detected in the first to third rounds. As a result, the additional bonus A of the winning pattern 1 brings the planned number of prize balls to 90.

The hit pattern 2 corresponds to the bonus B to be added, and is a hit pattern in which the specified round number and the actual round number are specified as 3R. The hit pattern 2 is defined such that the 1R eye is the open/close pattern A and the 2R eye and the 3R eye are the open/close pattern B. In addition, the inter-round intervals between the first round and the second round and between the second round and the third round are defined as an interval pattern b. In such a hit pattern 2 (additional bonus B), two prizes equal to the specified number of prizes are detected in the first round, while the inter-round interval before the start of the second round and the start of the third round is relatively long. Therefore, 2+2 over-winning prizes are detected in the 2R and 3R. As a result, in the additional bonus B of the hit pattern 2, the planned number of prize balls becomes 150.

The hit pattern 3 corresponds to the bonus C to be added, and is a hit pattern in which the specified round number and the actual round number are specified as 3R. The hit pattern 3 is defined so that the 1R eye is the open/close pattern A and the 2R eye and the 3R eye are the open/close pattern C. In addition, the inter-round intervals between the first round and the second round and between the second round and the third round are defined to be the interval pattern a. In such a hit pattern 3 (additional bonus C), two prizes equal to the specified number of prizes are detected in the first round, while a relatively long closing time (1.98) in the second and third rounds. Since a middle interval is provided, one win is detected in the first open state of each of the 2nd and 3rd rounds, and then 1+2 over-wins are detected in the second open state after the end of the middle interval of the round. To be done. As a result, in the additional bonus C of the winning pattern 3, the planned number of prize balls becomes 150.

The hit pattern 4 corresponds to the bonus D to be added, and is a hit pattern in which the specified round number and the actual round number are specified as 3R. The hit pattern 3 is defined such that the 1R eye is the open/close pattern A, the 2R eye is the open/close pattern B, and the 3R eye is the open/close pattern C. Further, the inter-round interval between the first round and the second round is defined as an interval pattern b, and the inter-round interval between the second round and the third round is defined as an interval pattern a. In such a hit pattern 4 (additional bonus D), two winnings equal to the specified winning number are detected in the first round, while an interval pattern b in which the inter-round interval before the second round starts is relatively long. As a result, 2+2 over-winning prizes are detected in the 2nd round, and a relatively long closing time (1.98) round interval is provided in the 3rd round, so in the first open state in the 3rd round. After one winning is detected, 1+2 over winnings are detected in the second open state after the end of the interval during the round. As a result, in the bonus D for addition in the winning pattern 3, the planned number of prize balls is 150.

In the third embodiment, as in the hit pattern 4, a round (2R) that realizes 2+2 over-winnings by an interval between rounds and a round (3R that realizes 1+3 over-winnings by an interval during a round). However, it is also possible to specify at least one hit pattern having such a content and then set different specified round numbers for all or some of the hit patterns. Further, as the types of intervals between rounds and intervals during rounds, more types may be provided according to the specifications.

[Additional bonus effect pattern selection table]
FIG. 63 is a view showing the additional bonus effect pattern selection table. The additional bonus effect pattern selection table is a table for collectively determining additional effects patterns, additional characters, and additional numbers according to the type of additional bonus as effect contents during the round. The add-on bonus effect pattern selection table is provided for each of the add-on bonuses A to D, and the number of rounds to be a reference item, the add-on pattern, the add-on character, and the number of additions to be decided items, and various decision items by lottery. The selection rate (%) for selecting is specified. In the hit start interval before the start of the first bonus of the bonus to be added, an additional character appears and "60" is displayed as the initial value of the planned number of prize balls. The addition bonus effect pattern selection table is referred to in a hit effect pattern determination process (not shown), and in this hit effect pattern determination process, the addition pattern, the addition character, and the number of additions are determined.

According to the add-on bonus effect pattern selection table associated with the add-on bonus A (add-on bonus A), the add-on patterns A-1 to A-4 corresponding to the add-on bonus A, "female", and "animal" add-on characters , And the number of additions to be notified for each round number is selected at a predetermined selection rate. For example, when the "female" addition character is selected in the addition pattern A-1, the addition number "30" is notified in the 1R and the addition number is not notified in the 2R and 3R. The number "90", which is the sum of the number of additions notified in this way and the initial value "60", is the planned number of prizes.

According to the add-on bonus effect pattern selection table associated with the add-on bonus B (add-on bonus B), the add-on patterns B-1 to B-4 corresponding to the add-on bonus B, “fireworks”, and “female” are added. The character and the number of additions to be notified for each round number are selected at a predetermined selection rate. For example, when the additional character of “Fireworks” is selected in the additional pattern B-1, the additional number “30” is notified in each of the 1R to 3R. The planned winning number is the numerical value "150", which is the sum of the added number notified in this way and the initial value "60".

According to the add-on bonus effect pattern selection table (add-on bonus C) associated with the add-on bonus C, the add-on patterns C-1 to C-6 corresponding to the add-on bonus C, "fireworks master", "female", " The additional character of “animal” and the additional number notified for each round number are selected at a predetermined selection rate. For example, when the additional character of “Fireworks” is selected in the additional pattern C-1, the additional number “30” is notified in the 1R, the additional number “10” is notified in the 2R, and the additional is added in the 3R. The number "50" is reported. The planned winning number is the numerical value "150", which is the sum of the added number notified in this way and the initial value "60".

According to the add-on bonus effect pattern selection table associated with the add-on bonus D (add-on bonus D), the add-on patterns D-1 to D-6 corresponding to the add-on bonus D, "fireworks teacher", "female", and " The additional character of “animal” and the additional number notified for each round number are selected at a predetermined selection rate. For example, when the additional character of “Fireworks” is selected in the additional pattern D-1, the additional number “30” is notified in the 1R, the additional number “40” is notified in the 2R, and the additional character is added in the 3R. The number "20" is reported. The planned winning number is the numerical value "150", which is the sum of the added number notified in this way and the initial value "60".

It should be noted that the selection rate for allocating the addition patterns and the number of additions that are the decision items in the addition bonus effect pattern selection table is not limited to that shown in FIG. 63. The additional bonus effect pattern selection table may be applied to the above-described first embodiment or second embodiment. Regarding the number of additions, for example, it may be stipulated that they are collectively notified in the first R. Although the initial value of the planned number of prize balls is set to "60" as an example, the initial bonus value may be set to "90" so that the additional bonus A does not notify the additional number.

[Effects of Gaming Machine of Third Embodiment]
According to the pachinko gaming machine of the third embodiment, in addition to the same effects as those of the first or second embodiment, the following effects are also obtained.

In the pachinko gaming machine of the present embodiment, a round game having an opening/closing pattern C capable of realizing an over-winning by controlling the time of an interval during a round, and an over-winning by controlling the time of an interval between rounds as an interval pattern b. Since it is possible to provide the big hit game state of the hit pattern 4 including both the feasible opening/closing pattern B round game, it is possible to further enhance the interest in the big hit game state. In addition, for example, like a hit pattern 3 or a hit pattern 4, a big hit game state in which over-winning is possible by a round game (for example, the 3rd R) that is opened twice across a round interval, like a hit pattern 2. , There is a jackpot gaming state in which over-winning is possible even by a round game (1R and 2R) that is only opened once. That is, since it is possible to realize over-winning in excess of the specified number of winnings in one round game in any of the big hitting game states of the hit patterns 2 to 4, it is possible to further enhance the interest in the big hitting game state.

<First modification of the special winning opening shutter>
Next, a first modification of the special winning opening shutter will be described with reference to FIGS. The same or similar components as those of the first embodiment described above are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.
[Specifications of special winning opening shutter according to first modification]
First, the specifications of the special winning opening shutter 37B according to the first modification will be described with reference to FIG. In addition, also in FIG. 64, the positional relationship between the special winning opening shutter 37B (the special winning opening 37) and the special winning opening count switch 370 is schematically illustrated as being different from FIG. 3 and the like for convenience.

As shown in FIG. 64, the special winning opening shutter 37B has a longitudinal dimension L1 of about d×12=132 mm when the diameter d of the game ball is 11 mm, for example. As a result, a maximum of 12 game balls can simultaneously pass on the upper surface of the special winning opening shutter 37B in the closed state. However, also in this modification, the firing interval from the launch of one game ball in response to the start of the launch operation until the launch of the next one game ball, and the launch of one game ball Considering the arrival time from when the game ball is located at the right end portion of the special winning opening shutter 37B, a maximum of six game balls can be assumed to be simultaneously passable. Further, the longest time until the game ball reaching the right end portion of the special winning opening shutter 37B is detected by the special winning opening count switch 370 is about 1.32 s, and the shortest time of the inter-round interval is 1. It is set to be about .32 s (may be 1.32 s or more). As a result, it is possible to surely detect the game ball won in the previous round game before the special winning opening 37 is opened again. Also, in the inter-round inter-pal, it is possible that more game balls than the specified winning number cannot exist on the special winning opening shutter 37B. Note that the time required for the special winning opening shutter 37B to move from one of the positions where the special winning opening 37 is in the closed state and the position where it is in the open state to the other position is the same as in the above-described embodiment. The same as

In applying such a special winning opening shutter 37B, similar to the above-described embodiment, the number of shots per minute is 90.90 pieces/minute, the firing interval is 0.66 seconds, and a large amount is set from the firing preparation position. It is assumed that it takes approximately 3.00 to 3.33 seconds to reach the right end portion of the winning opening shutter 37B. The upper surface of the special winning opening shutter 37B is an inclined surface such that the game ball advances by 11 mm in 0.33 seconds, that is, advances by 22 mm every 0.66 seconds. The other points are similar to those of the above-described embodiment. As a result, a maximum of six game balls can be passed at the same time.

[Operation example when over-winning occurs]
Next, with reference to FIG. 65 and FIG. 66, an operation example when an over-winning occurs when the special winning opening shutter 37B is applied will be described.

65 and 66 are views for explaining the operation of the special winning opening shutter 37B when an over-winning occurs. Note that FIGS. 65 and 66 schematically show the behavior from the hit start interval to the start of the first to fourth rounds. different. Regardless of the round update, each game ball is numbered in the order of firing, such as (0), (1),.... Further, the prescribed number of winnings is “3” as an example.

First, as shown in FIG. 65(A), the special winning opening shutter 37B closes the special winning opening 37 in the hit start interval.

Next, as shown in FIG. 65(B), when the specified time of the hit start interval elapses, the first prize starts and the special winning opening shutter 37B retracts in the direction of the white arrow to open the special winning opening 37. Make it open. Even at this time, the game ball has not reached the right end of the special winning opening 37.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 65(C), the game ball (1) launched after a lapse of a predetermined time from the start of the 1R eye rolls to the vicinity of the right end of the special winning opening 37 in the open state.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 65(D), the game ball (1) passes through the opened special winning opening 37 and drops downward, and the special winning opening count switch 370 detects the winning. . At this time, the winning number of the first prize has not reached the specified winning number "3" yet, so the special winning opening 37 is kept open.

Then, when approximately 1.32 s has passed from the state of FIG. 65(D), as shown in FIG. 65(E), the third game ball (3) is located at the right end portion of the special winning opening shutter 37B. To reach. As a result, the winning of the game ball (3) is detected by the special winning opening count switch 370, and accordingly, the special winning opening shutter 37B closes the special winning opening 37 and the inter-round interval before the start of the second round starts. .

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 65(F), when the special winning opening shutter 37B is in a state where the special winning opening 37 is completely closed during the inter-round interval before the start of the second round, the game balls (4), ( 5) reaches the right end portion of the special winning opening shutter 37B, and rolls from the right side to the left side along the upper surface of the special winning opening shutter 37B. Such a state of FIG. 65(F) is approximately 1.32 seconds after the start of the inter-round interval.

After that, as shown in FIG. 65(G), when the second round starts, the special winning opening shutter 37B opens the special winning opening 37. At this time, on the upper surface of the special winning opening shutter 37B, the game balls (4) and (5) were in the passing state, so the two game balls (4) and (5) were in the open state. The special winning opening 37 is passed at once and falls downward, and the special winning opening count switch 370 detects two winnings. Furthermore, the next game ball (6) is rolling to the vicinity of the right end of the big winning opening 37 in the open state, and this game ball (6) will soon be detected as a prize. As a result, the special winning opening shutter 37B closes the special winning opening 37 again, and the inter-round interval before the start of the third round starts. Such a state of FIG. 65(G) is approximately 1.72 s after the start of the inter-round interval, and is 0.4 s after the start of the second round.

After that, as shown in FIG. 66(H), when the special winning opening shutter 37B completely closes the special winning opening 37 during the inter-round interval before the start of the third round, the game balls (7) to (). 12) reaches the right end portion of the special winning opening shutter 37B and rolls from the right side to the left side along the upper surface of the special winning opening shutter 37B. Such a state of FIG. 66(H) is about 3.76 s after the start of the inter-round interval, and 4.02 s after the start of the state of FIG. 65(G). In this way, in order to generate a state in which the six game balls (7) to (12) are present on the upper surface of the special winning opening shutter 37B, the time between rounds before the start of the third round is approximately 3 with a margin. It is set to about 96 seconds.

After that, as shown in FIG. 66(I), when the third round starts, the special winning opening shutter 37B opens the special winning opening 37. At this time, since the game balls (7) to (12) exist on the upper surface of the special winning opening shutter 37B, these six game balls (7) to (12) are in an open state. The special winning opening 37 is passed all at once and falls downward, and the special winning opening count switch 370 detects 6 winnings. That is, immediately after the start of the 3rd round when the inter-round interval ends, 3+3 over-winning prizes are detected. Such a state of FIG. 66(I) is about 3.97 s after the start of the inter-round interval, including 0.01 s required for the opening/closing operation of the special winning opening shutter 37B.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 66(J), the special winning opening shutter 37B closes the special winning opening 37 again, and the inter-round interval before the start of the 4th R starts. After that, the game ball (13) reaches the right end portion of the special winning opening shutter 37B. Such a state of FIG. 66(J) is approximately 0.06 s after the start of the inter-round interval.

After that, as shown in FIG. 66(K), when the special winning opening shutter 37B completely closes the special winning opening 37 during the inter-round interval before the start of the 4th R, the game balls (13) to (13). (18) reaches the right end portion of the special winning opening shutter 37B and rolls from the right side to the left side along the upper surface of the special winning opening shutter 37B. Such a state of FIG. 66(K) is approximately 3.36 seconds after the start of the inter-round interval.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 66(L), when the 4th R starts, the special winning opening shutter 37B opens the special winning opening 37. At this time, on the upper surface of the special winning opening shutter 37B, the game ball (13) does not drop into the special winning opening 37 by advancing outward from the left end, while the following game balls (14) to (18) Since there is a game ball (19) that is in the state of being present and has just reached the right end portion of the special winning opening shutter 37B, these six game balls (14) to (19) are in the open state. All the holes 37 are passed all at once and fall downward, and the special winning opening count switch 370 detects 6 winnings. That is, even immediately after the start of the 4th round after the inter-round interval has ended, 3+3 over-winning prizes are detected. Such a state of FIG. 66(L) is after the time required for the opening/closing operation of the special winning opening shutter 37B is 0.01 s after the start of the 4th R, and after about 3.97 s has elapsed since the start of the inter-round interval. ..

[Effects of the gaming machine of the first modified example]
In this way, the over-winning prize can also be realized by appropriately setting the specified winning number and the time between rounds using the special winning opening shutter 37B. Note that, for example, from the state of FIG. 66(G), the special winning opening 37 is in an open state until a certain amount of time that allows winning of the game ball (6) has passed, but from the state of FIG. 66(G). It is closed immediately, specifically, it is closed about 0.1 s after the start of the round, and then the special winning opening 37 is once closed for a predetermined time as an interval during the round, and then opened again. You may do it. At this time, for example, if the interval time during the round is about 1.32 s, two game balls can be positioned on the upper surface of the special winning opening shutter 37B during that time, and 2+2 over-winning can be realized. You can If the interval time during the round is about 1.98 s, three game balls can be positioned on the upper surface of the special winning opening shutter 37B during that time, and 2+3 over-winning can be realized. If the interval time during the round is about 2.64 s, four game balls can be positioned on the upper surface of the special winning opening shutter 37B during that period, and 2+4 over-winning can be realized. Of course, the over-win prize may be realized only by adjusting the time of the interval between rounds without providing the interval during the round.

<Second modified example of game board and variable winning device>
Next, a second modified example of the game board and the variable winning device will be described with reference to FIG. 67. The same or similar components as those of the first embodiment described above are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

[Game board]
As shown in FIG. 67, the game board 1 is provided with a second special winning opening 37 capable of over-winning like the big winning opening of the above-described first embodiment, and the known first over-winning is difficult. It has a special winning opening 36. The first big winning opening 36 is provided in the upper part of the game area 1p. The first special winning opening 36 is provided with a first special winning opening shutter 36A for opening and closing the opening. The first special winning opening shutter 36A is configured to open and close the first special winning opening 36 by tilting in the front-back direction. Such a first special winning opening shutter 36A has a first mode in which the game ball can easily pass through the passage area (first winning port 36) and a second mode in which it is difficult to close. It realizes a variable member that can vary. Such a first big winning opening 36 is also opened in the big hit game state which is a game state advantageous to the player.

The second special winning opening 37, the second special winning opening shutter 37A, the second special winning opening count switch 370, and the second special winning opening shutter solenoid 370A have the same functions as those of the above-described embodiment. It is provided. Although not particularly shown, a first special winning opening count switch and a first special winning opening shutter solenoid are also provided as those related to the first special winning opening 36 having the same functions as these. That is, when the winning of the game balls to the first special winning opening 36 is detected by the first special winning opening count switch, the payout device 83 pays out a preset number of game balls as the prize balls. Further, the first special winning opening shutter solenoid for driving the first special winning opening shutter 36A is exclusively controlled. Accordingly, the first special winning opening shutter 36A is driven so as to change between an open state in which the game balls can be won in the first special winning opening 36 and a closed state in which the game balls cannot be won or difficult. To be done. The opening drive of the first special winning opening 36 by the first special winning opening shutter 36A may be exclusively controlled with the opening driving of the second special winning opening 37 in the big hit game state. That is, for example, in the 1R, the second special winning opening 37 can be opened based on a predetermined opening/closing pattern, while the first special winning opening 36 is continuously closed, and in the next 2R, It is possible to perform control such that the first special winning opening 36 can be opened based on a predetermined opening/closing pattern, while the second special winning opening 37 is continuously closed.

The second guide rail 30' is similar to the above-described embodiment, but has the following configuration. That is, the second guide rail 30' is not provided with a convex portion that can come into contact with the game ball. Therefore, the game ball flowing down through the second guide rail 30' is discharged from the lower end 30A' of the second guide rail 30' without the traveling speed being reduced. The lower end 30A' of the second guide rail 30' is located in the vicinity of the upper right side of the second special winning opening 37, and is curved so as to discharge the game ball substantially leftward. As a result, the game ball released from the lower end 30A' of the second guide rail 30' hits the right end portion of the second special winning opening shutter 37A when the second special winning opening shutter 37A described later is closed. At the beginning of contact, it rolls along its upper surface and moves to the left.

The second special winning opening shutter 37A is formed to have a size similar to that of the first embodiment described above, etc., but its upper surface is an inclined surface that tends to move downward to the right in a closed state. An upper surface 43a (not shown in FIG. 67) of the cover member 43 is connected to the left end of the closed second win-win port shutter 37A, and has an inclined surface that is inclined downward to the same degree as the second win-win shutter 37A. It has become. The upper surface 43a has the effect of decelerating the plurality of game balls that have moved along the upper surface of the second special winning opening shutter 37A. That is, the upper surface of the second special winning opening shutter 37A and the upper surface 43a of the cover member 43 are inclined downward to the right, so that the speed at which the game ball moves to the left is effectively reduced, and these upper surfaces Initially, all the game balls that travel along the left turn to the left but turn to the right in the middle, and are guided outward from the right end of the second special winning opening shutter 37A. An outlet 41A is provided on the lower right side of the second special winning opening shutter 37A. As a result, the game ball guided outward from the right end of the second special winning opening shutter 37A is collected through the out opening 41. Although not particularly shown, the cover member 43 is provided with a front end guide portion 43b and a plurality of convex portions 43d, which also effectively reduce the traveling speed of the game ball. The upper surface 43a of the cover member 43 and the second special winning opening shutter 37A as described above form the suppressing portion 430. Regarding the second special winning opening shutter and the cover member, some of the game balls traveling along them are guided to the outside from the right end of the special winning opening shutter, and the remaining game. The inclination angle of the upper surface may be set to an appropriate angle so that the sphere is guided outward from the left end of the upper surface of the cover member.

[Effects of the game machine of the second modified example]
According to the gaming machine of the second modified example, when the second special winning opening shutter 37A is in the closed state, the game balls are likely to cause congestion on the upper surface of the second special winning opening shutter 37A. Since it can be retained on the upper surface of the shutter 37A, it is possible to increase the degree of expectation for over-winning while keeping the interest in the whereabouts of the game ball.

Further, according to the gaming machine of the second modified example, the round game with a possibility of over-winning and the round game with no possibility of over-winning are the second big winning opening 37 or the first open game. It can be easily recognized only by checking the special winning opening 36. In short, for example, in the first half rounds of the 1st to 7th rounds, it is difficult to over-win by opening and closing only the first special winning opening 36, while in the latter half rounds of the 8th to 16th rounds, only the second winning opening 37 is opened and closed. By doing so, it is possible to over-win. In such a case, in the big hit game state, the first big winning opening shutter 36A is in an open state and it is difficult to over-win, and the second big winning opening shutter 37A is in an open state, and a time when over winning is possible. Since it can be clearly distinguished, for example, in the first half of the big hit game state, it is possible to concentrate on the effect display of the extra bonus, while in the second half of the big hit game state, an over-prize is generated to further enhance the interest of the game. Can be increased.

<Third modified example of the variable winning device>
Next, a third modified example of the variable winning device will be described with reference to FIGS. The same or similar components as those of the first embodiment described above are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted. Further, in the following description, unless otherwise specified, the special winning opening is in a closed state. The variable winning device according to the third modification can be applied to the game board 1 shown in FIG. 3 and the game board 1 shown in FIG. 67.

As shown in FIGS. 68 to 79, the third modified example is different from the variable winning device 90 according to the above-described embodiment and modified example. The variable winning device 90 includes a cover member 91 and an opening/closing unit 92 as basic components. The opening/closing unit 92 includes a front base plate 920, a back base member 921, a main stage 922, an upper stage 923, an upper lid 924, and a drive unit 925. On the front portion 922a of the main stage 922, a shutter surface 922b which is slightly downwardly inclined to the left is formed as a portion corresponding to the special winning opening shutter. The front base plate 920, the front portion 922a and the shutter surface 922b of the main stage 922 are located on the front side of the game board 1, while the back base member 921, the other parts of the main stage 922, the upper stage 923, and the upper lid 924. The section and the drive unit 925 are arranged on the back surface side of the game board 1.

The cover member 91 has a front end guide portion 91b and a plurality of convex portions 91d, similar to those according to the first embodiment, while having a right upper surface 91a and an upper left surface 91a' on the right and left sides of the upper portion. An opening 91c serving as the special winning opening 37 is formed between the right upper surface 91a and the upper left surface 91a'. Since the introduction portion 920c described later is located above the right upper surface 91a, the game ball B hardly contacts the upper surface 91a.

The front base plate 920 is provided in the penetrating portion 1c provided so as to reach the back surface of the game board 1 from the game area 1p. The front base plate 920 has an opening 920a at the center, and the front portion 922a of the main stage 922 is exposed through the opening 920a and the through portion 1c. In addition, at the center of the right end of the opening 920a, the game ball B guided forward along a step surface 922c of the main stage 922, which will be described later, is placed on the shutter surface 922b in the closed state or the large winning opening 37 in the open state. A discharge part 920b capable of discharging is provided. At the upper right end of the opening 920a, an introducing portion 920c for guiding the flowing down game ball B to a guide path 924b of an upper lid 924 described later is provided. Such a front base plate 920 also serves as an accessory to the game board 1.

The back base member 921 is for supporting the main stage 922, the upper stage 923, and the drive unit 925 on the back surface side of the game board 1, as shown in FIGS. 76 and 77. A main stage 922 is supported on the upper part of the back base member 921 via a first shaft 921a extending in the left-right direction so as to be tiltable in the front-rear direction, and a second shaft extending higher than the main stage 922 extending in the left-right direction. The upper stage 923 is supported so as to be tiltable in the front-rear direction via 921b. The shaft 921a is provided so as to be displaceable in the vertical direction by a predetermined distance, and the main stage 922 is so arranged that the shutter surface 922b is displaced from the position where the special winning opening 37 is closed to the position where it is opened. When tilted, the shaft 921a is accordingly displaced from the high position to the low position. A drive unit 925 is arranged at the bottom of the back base member 921. Further, on the left side surface portion of the back base member 921, there is provided a recovery port 921c capable of recovering the game ball B guided forward along a step surface 922c of the main stage 922 (see FIG. 75). ). Such a back base member 921 also serves as an accessory to the game board 1.

The main stage 922 has a front portion 922a, a shutter surface 922b, and a step surface 922c. At the front end of the staircase surface 922c, a standing front portion 922a is formed so as to face the cover member 91, a shutter surface 922b is formed at the front portion 922a, and a plurality of abuttable balls B can be contacted. Convex portions 922d are provided at predetermined intervals. The staircase surface 922c is formed in a plurality of steps so as to have a step which becomes lower as going from the rear to the front. The staircase surface 922c of each step is a sloped surface that is slightly inclined downward, and is also a slope that alternates downward rightward, downward leftward, and downward rightward as it progresses from the upper stage to the middle stage to the lower stage. According to such a staircase surface 922c, a passage is formed which meanders the game ball B to the left and right and guides it from the upper stage to the middle stage to the lower stage. When the shutter surface 922b is in the closed state, the game ball B reaching the lower stage of the staircase surface 922c is guided to the shutter surface 922b through the discharging portion 920b and directly collected through the collecting port 921c. A plurality of convex portions 922e capable of contacting the game ball B are also provided at predetermined intervals on the stepped portion of the stair surface 922c of each step. Such a main stage 922 can be tilted in the front-rear direction by a drive unit 925, as shown in FIGS. That is, as shown in FIG. 77, when the main stage 922 is in a downwardly sloping posture, the staircase surface 922c also has a relatively downwardly sloping posture, and the front portion 922a and the shutter surface 922b have the opening 920a. Move down. As a result, the gap between the upper end of the opening 920a and the front portion 922a is enlarged, and the plurality of game balls B on the staircase surface 922c are simultaneously guided to the special winning opening 37 through this gap.

The upper stage 923 is adjacent to the upper part of the main stage 922 and has an upper surface 923a having a step difference higher than that of the uppermost staircase surface 922c of the main stage 922. The central portion of the upper surface 923a is an inclined portion that is lower than both ends and is inclined downward to the front, and the game ball B naturally moves to the stair surface 922c through this portion. The game ball B is guided to the upper surface 923a of the upper stage 923 as described above through the introducing portion 920c and the guide path 924b of the upper lid 924 described later. When the shutter surface 922b is in the closed state, the front end of the upper stage 923 is provided with a plurality of convex portions 923e capable of contacting the game ball B at predetermined intervals. As shown in FIGS. 76 and 77, such an upper stage 923 can be tilted in the front-rear direction in conjunction with the main stage 922. That is, as shown in FIG. 77, when the upper stage 923 is inclined downward to the front, the upper surface 923a is also inclined relatively downward to the front, and the plurality of game balls B on the upper surface 923a are collectively moved. It will be guided to the staircase surface 922c. The main stage and the upper stage may be integrally formed. Further, the main stage and the upper stage may overlap each other in the open state.

The upper lid 924 covers the staircase surface 922c of the main stage 922 and the upper stage 923, and has a guide path 924b connected to the introduction portion 920c and an inner wall 924c extending in the left-right direction. The guide path 924b is formed so as to guide the game ball B from the introduction portion 920c to the upper surface 923a of the upper stage 923. The inner wall 924c is arranged so as to face each step surface while leaving a gap allowing the game ball B to pass between each step surface of the main stage 922. Further, on the inner wall 924c, a plurality of convex portions 924e capable of contacting the game ball B are provided at predetermined intervals. The inner wall 924c, the convex portion 924e, the staircase surface 922c, and the convex portion 922e suppress the passage of the game ball B while meandering the game ball B left and right along the staircase surface 922c of each step. The portion 930 is formed. Such an upper lid 924 also serves as an accessory to the game board 1.

The drive unit 925 tilts the main stage 922, and mainly includes a drive motor 925a, a drive gear 925b, a pair of intermediate gears 925c and 925d, a pair of driven gears 925e and 925f, two push-up pipes 925g and 925h, and It has two rotational position sensors 925j and 925k. The driving force of the drive motor 925a is transmitted to the driven gear 925e via the drive gear 925b and the intermediate gears 925c and 925d, and is further transmitted to the driven gear 925f meshed with the driven gear 925e. The drive motor 925a and the rotational position sensors 925j and 925k are connected to the main CPU 61 via a control circuit (not shown) and are controlled by the main CPU 61 or supply a predetermined signal.

Cylindrical peripheral walls are formed on the driven gears 925e and 925f, and inward projecting pieces 9250e abutting on the semi-helical cam surfaces 9250g and 9250h formed on the push-up pipes 925g and 925h are formed on the peripheral walls. , 9250f are provided. Further, on the peripheral wall of one driven gear 925e, two outwardly projecting pieces 9251e, 9252e are provided so that the rotational position sensors 925j, 925k can detect the predetermined rotational position. The push-up pipes 925g and 925h are inserted into the driven gears 925e and 925f while being constantly urged upward via the springs 925m and 925n. A cam cover 925p is provided above the push-up pipes 925g and 925h, and the cam cover 925p is always in contact with the lower portion of the main stage 922. As shown by the solid line in FIG. 78, at the rotational position where the protruding piece 9251e is detected by the rotational position sensor 925k, the protruding pieces 9250e, 9250f come into contact with the uppermost portions of the cam surfaces 9250g, 9250h. The push-up pipes 925g and 925h are maintained in the low position against the biasing force of the springs 925m and 925n. As a result, the main stage 922 is in a tilted posture, and the special winning opening 37 is open. On the other hand, when the driven gears 925e and 925f rotate by approximately 180 degrees in the direction of the arrow in FIG. 78, the projecting piece 9252e comes to the rotational position detected by the rotational position sensor 925j, as indicated by the phantom line in the figure. In this state, the protruding pieces 9250e, 9250f abut on the lowermost portions of the cam surfaces 9250g, 9250h, so that the push-up pipes 925g, 925h are maintained at high positions as shown in FIG. As a result, the main stage 922 is in a non-tilted posture, and the special winning opening 37 is closed. Further, when the special winning opening 37 is closed and then opened again, the driven gears 925e and 925f rotate approximately 180 degrees in the direction of the arrow in FIG. 78, so that the projecting pieces 9250e and 9250f. The cam surfaces 9250g and 9250h are rotated while being pressed against the cam surfaces 9250g and 9250h. As a result, the state again shown in FIG. 77 is reached, and the special winning opening 37 is opened. That is, the main stage 922 takes an inclined posture and a non-inclined posture every time the driven gears 925e and 925f are rotated by approximately 180 degrees in one direction, and accordingly, the special winning opening 37 is opened and closed.

[Effects of Gaming Machine of Third Modification]
According to the gaming machine of the third modified example as described above, the game ball B is guided to the suppressing unit 930 and the traveling speed thereof is effectively increased without tilting the main stage 922 and operating a member other than this. It is possible to decelerate and suppress, and it is possible to simultaneously guide the plurality of game balls B suppressed by the suppressing unit 930 to the special winning opening 37 as the shutter surface 922b is opened. As a result, it is possible to adjust the number of passages of the game ball B to the special winning opening 37 without separately providing a storage device or the like, which suppresses an increase in the number of parts and an increase in cost and eliminates a heat problem around the game board. can do.

Further, the game ball B rolling in the game area 1p is allowed to flow into the suppressing portion 930 through the introducing portion 920c and the guide path 924b without directly colliding with the shutter surface 922b, and in the suppressing portion 930, the upper side of the stair surface 922c Since the game ball B can be smoothly guided from the rear end portion to the lower front end portion without any trouble, the shutter surface 922b can be prevented from being damaged.

Further, also on the staircase surface 922c of the suppressing portion 930, the traveling speed of the game ball B can be effectively decelerated/suppressed by the meandering passages and the convex portions 922e, 923e, 924e, and the progress thereof can be further delayed. it can.

Further, since the game ball B can be guided from the game area 1p on the front surface side of the game board 1 to the suppressing portion 930 on the back surface side, a sufficient distance for decelerating/suppressing the traveling speed of the game ball B is secured. be able to.

In addition, in the suppressing portion 930, a passage that can effectively suppress the progress of the game ball B can be formed by the plurality of convex portions 922e, 923e, and 924e, and a plurality of games can be formed by the stair surface 922c that tends to fall forward. The balls B can be simultaneously led to the special winning opening 37, and the over-winning can be easily realized.

Further, not all of the game ball B whose progress is suppressed in the suppression unit 930 is guided to the special winning opening 37, but a part thereof is guided to the outside of the game area 1p through the collecting opening 920c. It is possible to prevent the game ball B from passing excessively with respect to 37.

<Fourth Modification of Variable Winning Device>
Next, a fourth modified example of the variable winning device will be described with reference to FIGS. The same or similar components as those of the third modification described above are designated by the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted. In the variable winning device according to the fourth modified example, mainly the main stage 922 is different from that according to the third modified example. The variable winning device according to the fourth modification can also be applied to the game board 1 shown in FIG. 3 and the game board 1 shown in FIG. 67.

In the main stage 922 of the fourth modification, the shutter surface 922b is formed on the front portion 922a, but the convex portion is not provided. Of course, you may make it provide a convex part. In addition, the convex portion is not provided on the step portion of the upper lid 924 or the staircase surface 922c which are not entirely illustrated. The staircase surface 922c of each step is an inclined surface having a slightly downward inclination, and is formed so as to have an uneven or wavy repeating shape along the left-right direction. The upper surface 923a of the upper stage 923 is also formed in a concavo-convex shape or a wavy shape like the staircase surface 922c. According to the staircase surface 922c and the upper surface 923a, when the game ball B moves from the upper stage to the middle stage to the lower stage, it easily rocks in the left-right direction, and accordingly, the time to reach the lower stage is prolonged. The traveling speed of the game ball B can be decelerated more effectively.

As shown by the solid line in FIG. 82, when the shutter surface 922b is in the closed state, the game ball B reaching the lower stage of the staircase surface 922c is guided to the shutter surface 922b through the discharge section 920b (not shown). An inclined support surface 922f is provided at the bottom of the main stage 922, and a slide plate 926 that can reciprocate in the front-rear direction is in contact with the inclined support surface 922f. The bottom of the main stage 922 is supported by the slide plate 926. The slide plate 926 is moved in the front-rear direction by a drive unit 925 (not shown).

That is, as shown by the phantom line in FIG. 82, when the slide plate 926 is in contact with the inclined support surface 922f and retracts to a predetermined position in the rear, the main stage 922 becomes an inclined posture in which the front is lowered. Then, the staircase surface 922c also has a relatively steep posture in which it descends to the front, and the front portion 922a and the shutter surface 922b move below the opening 920a (not shown). As a result, the plurality of game balls B on the stairs 922c are guided to the special winning opening 37 all at once. A mechanism similar to that of the drive unit 925 according to the third modification described above may be applied to the mechanism for tilting the main stage.

[Effects of Gaming Machine of Fourth Modification]
According to the gaming machine of the fourth modified example, it is possible to configure a variable winning device capable of over-winning with simpler parts and structure, effectively suppressing an increase in the number of parts and manufacturing cost. it can.

<Another Example of Fourth Modification>
Next, a variable winning device according to another example of the fourth modification will be described with reference to FIGS. The same or similar components as those of the above-described fourth modified example are designated by the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted. 83 is a plan view showing the main stage 922, FIG. 84 is a plan view showing the upper unit 924′, and FIG. 85 is a view for schematically explaining the opening/closing operation of the main stage 922. .. 83 and 84 show a configuration in which the components of the variable winning device (main stage 922, upper unit 924') are provided in the penetrating portion 1c of the game board 1 without any gap. Actually, the components of the variable winning device are provided in the penetrating portion 1c of the game board 1 with a certain gap.

The main stage 922 shown in FIG. 83 is formed integrally with the upper stage. The main stage 922 is also formed in a concavo-convex shape or a wave shape along the left-right direction, and has a step surface 922c which is an inclined surface that is slightly inclined downward toward the front. A shutter surface 922b is integrally formed at the front end (front portion) 922a of the staircase surface 922c. The staircase surface 922c and the shutter surface 922b are formed to have the same size in the left-right direction. The upper unit 924′ shown in FIG. 84 is similar to the upper lid 924 described above, but does not have a plate-shaped member facing the entire surface of the staircase surface 922c in the closed state, and the upper unit 924′ is provided after the main stage 922 from the introduction portion 920c. It has a guide path 924b for leading the game ball B to the upper stage of the staircase surface 922c by wrapping around to the upper end. The rear end portion 924f of the guide path 924b is disposed above the rear end of the main stage 922, and a communication space portion 924g communicating with the rear end of the main stage 922 is opened further behind the rear end portion 924f. There is. As a result, the game ball B guided to the rear end portion 924f of the guide path 924b drops to the rear end portion of the main stage 922 through the communication space portion 924g. Between the front end 922a of the staircase surface 922c and the upper end of the opening 920a (not shown), even when the main stage 922 is in the open state as well as the closed state, from the staircase surface 922c to the shutter surface 922b through the front end 922a. There is a relatively large gap through which the ball B can pass. As a result, even when the main stage 922 is in the closed state, the game ball B can be smoothly guided from the staircase surface 922c of the suppressing portion 930 to the shutter surface 922b.

As shown in FIG. 85(A), when the shutter surface 922b is in the closed state, the game ball B in the suppressing portion 930 passes through the opening 920a (not shown) from the upper stage to the lower stage along the stair surface 922c, and finally. To the shutter surface 922b. The main stage 922 as described above is tilted by the same mechanism as the drive unit 925 according to the third modification described above. The device for tilting the main stage may be, for example, another drive unit using a solenoid.

That is, as shown in FIG. 85(B), when the main stage 922 is inclined downward to the front, the staircase surface 922c is also inclined relatively downward to the front, and the shutter surface 922b has an opening (not shown). It moves below 920a. As a result, the plurality of game balls B on the stairs 922c are guided to the special winning opening 37 all at once. With the variable winning device including the main stage 922 and the upper unit 924', the same effect as that of the above-described fourth modification can be obtained.

<Fifth Modification of Variable Winning Device>
Next, a fifth modified example of the variable winning device will be described with reference to FIGS. 86 and 87. The same or similar components as those of the above-described third modified example and fourth modified example are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted. The variable winning device according to the fifth modification is also different from that according to the third modification mainly in the main stage 922. The variable winning device according to the fifth modified example can also be applied to the game board 1 shown in FIG. 3 and the game board 1 shown in FIG. 67.

The main stage 922 of the fifth modified example is formed up to the site of the upper stage, and has an inclined surface 922c' that uniformly tends to fall forward. Nothing is particularly provided on the inclined surface 922c'. The upper lid 924 has a plurality of partition walls 924c' on the surface facing the inclined surface 922c'. When the main stage 922 is in the posture of closing the special winning opening 37, the cut wall 924c' is bent left and right to meander when the game ball B moves from the upper side to the lower side along the inclined surface 922c'. To form a passage 930'. The partition wall 924c' is provided with a plurality of convex portions 924e capable of contacting the game ball B at predetermined intervals. By the passage 930' having such a convex portion 924e, when the game ball B moves downward along the inclined surface 922c', a suppressing portion for decelerating and suppressing the traveling speed by meandering left and right. Is formed. That is, even with the passage 930′ bent to the left and right, the game ball B meanders left and right when moving from the upper side to the lower side, so that the time to reach the lower end of the inclined surface 922c′ is prolonged, and the game ball is extended. The traveling speed of B can be reduced more effectively.

As shown by the solid line in FIG. 87, when the shutter surface 922b is in the closed state, the game ball B that has reached the lower end of the inclined surface 922c' is guided to the shutter surface 922b through the discharge portion 920b (not shown). An inclined support surface 922f is also provided on the bottom of the main stage 922, and a slide plate 926 that can reciprocate in the front-rear direction is in contact with the inclined support surface 922f. The bottom of the main stage 922 is supported by the slide plate 926. The slide plate 926 is moved in the front-rear direction by a drive unit 925 (not shown).

That is, as shown by the phantom line in FIG. 87, when the slide plate 926 comes in contact with the inclined support surface 922f and retracts to a predetermined position in the rear, the main stage 922 becomes an inclined posture in which the front is lowered. Then, the front surface 922a and the shutter surface 922b move below the opening 920a (not shown) while the inclined surface 922c' is in a more downwardly steep posture. At this time, the distance between the inclined surface 922c' and the partition wall 924c' becomes larger than the diameter of the game ball B, and the partition wall 924c' cannot prevent the progress of the game ball B. As a result, the bent passage 930' is eliminated, and the plurality of game balls B on the inclined surface 922c' are promptly guided to the special winning opening 37 without any trouble.

[Effects of Gaming Machine of Fifth Modification]
Even with the gaming machine of the fifth modified example, it is possible to configure a variable winning device capable of over-winning with simpler parts and structure, and effectively suppress an increase in the number of parts and a manufacturing cost. ..

<Another Example of Fifth Modification>
Next, a variable winning device according to another example of the fifth modification will be described with reference to FIGS. The same or similar components as those of the fifth modification described above are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted. 88 is a plan view showing the main stage 922, FIG. 84 is a plan view showing the upper unit 924′, and FIG. 85 is a view for schematically explaining the opening/closing operation of the main stage 922. .. 88 and 89 show a configuration in which the components of the variable winning device (main stage 922, upper unit 924') are provided in the penetrating portion 1c of the game board 1 without a gap. Actually, the components of the variable winning device are provided in the penetrating portion 1c of the game board 1 with a certain gap.

The main stage 922 shown in FIG. 88 is a member formed in a flat plate shape substantially in the same manner as that of the fifth modification described above, and the upper surface thereof is arranged as a sloped surface 922c' which is inclined downward to the front. The tip portion is used as the shutter surface 922b. The upper unit 924′ shown in FIG. 89 also does not have a plate-shaped member facing the entire surface of the inclined surface 922c′, and wraps around from the introduction portion 920c to the upper rear end of the main stage 922, and the upper end suitable portion of the inclined surface 922c′. It has a guide path 924b for guiding the game ball B to. Further, the upper unit 924' has a plurality of partition walls 924c' at a portion facing the inclined surface 922c'. The cut wall 924c' forms a left-right bent passage 930' for meandering when the game ball B moves from the upper side to the lower side along the inclined surface 922c' when the main stage 922 is in the closed state. ing. The partition wall 924c' is provided with a plurality of convex portions 924e capable of contacting the game ball B at predetermined intervals. By such a passage 930', a suppressing portion is formed that guides the game ball B along the inclined surface 922c' downward so as to meander the game ball B left and right while decelerating and suppressing the traveling speed. Between the outlet 930a' of the passage 930' and the upper end of the opening 920a (not shown), the main stage 922 is guided to the front end side of the inclined surface 922c' not only in the open state but also in the closed state. There is a relatively large gap through which the game ball B can pass. Accordingly, even when the main stage 922 is in the closed state, the game ball B can be smoothly guided along the passage 930' from the inclined surface 922c' to the shutter surface 922b.

As shown in FIG. 90(A), when the main stage 922 is in the closed state, the game ball B on the inclined surface 922c′ moves so as to meander from the upper side to the lower side along the passage 930′, and finally. Through the opening 920a (not shown), and is guided onto the shutter surface 922b. The main stage 922 as described above is tilted by the same mechanism as the drive unit 925 according to the third modification described above. The main stage 922 is supported at its rear end via a shaft 921a inserted into a vertically long hole 921d of the back base member 921, and can be tilted by rotating around the shaft 921a. The device for tilting the main stage may be, for example, another drive unit using a solenoid.

That is, as shown in FIG. 90(B), when the central portion of the main stage 922 is lowered by the drive unit 925, the main stage 922 tilts around the shaft 921a displaced downward along the vertically elongated hole 921d, and thus relatively moves. It becomes a steep downward slope. That is, the inclined surface 922c' also has a posture that is steeper than that in the state of FIG. 90A, and the shutter surface 922b moves below the opening 920a (not shown). As a result, the plurality of gaming balls B on the inclined surface 922c′ are separated from the partition wall 924c′, and the passage 930′ is eliminated, so that the plurality of gaming balls B are simultaneously enlarged along the inclined surface 922c′. It will be guided to the winning opening 37. Even with the variable winning device including the main stage 922 and the upper unit 924', the same effect as that of the fifth modified example can be obtained.

The present invention is not limited to the above embodiment.

In the above embodiment, the special winning opening shutter or the shutter surface is projected/retracted in the front-rear direction or tilted in the front-rear direction, but the big winning opening is opened/closed by sliding in the left/right direction, or around the vertical axis. The special winning opening can be opened and closed by swiveling, or the two special winning opening shutters can be arranged in parallel, and when the two special winning opening shutters are opened, the big winning opening can be opened and closed. You may.

Further, the surface shape of the special winning opening shutter or the shutter surface may be a sawtooth rough surface, an uneven surface, a wavy surface, or a shape in which a plurality of convex portions are discretely arranged on the entire surface. According to this, the traveling speed of the game ball can be decelerated more effectively.

Further, in the above-mentioned embodiment, although the special winning opening has a characteristic structure, for example, the same big winning opening shutter or a shutter surface as described above is applied to a blade member as an ordinary electric accessory, and an overrun occurs at the starting opening. Winning or control corresponding to this may be enabled.

Regarding the traveling speed of the game ball expressed in the description of the above embodiment, "deceleration" means that the game ball stops.

As another example of the third to fifth modifications, the entire area covered by the members (upper stage, main stage, etc.) constituting the stage may be used as the special winning opening.

When a plurality of special winning openings are provided, the prescribed number of prizes may be different or the number of prize balls may be different for each special winning opening. For example, as another example of the second modified example, for the first special winning opening, the prescribed number of winnings per round is 5, the number of prize balls per winning is 5, etc. As for the above, the prescribed number of prizes per round may be 10, the number of prize balls per prize may be 15, and the like.

When achieving more than the specified number of prizes by interpal during the round, for example, the following opening/closing pattern that changes the estimated number of prizes at the time of the first opening and the estimated number of prizes at the time of opening after closing during the round May be provided. Specifically, if the prescribed number of winnings per round is 10, the estimated number of winnings is 8 at the time of the first opening, and the estimated number of winnings is 4 at the time of subsequent opening, and the opening and closing pattern. An opening/closing pattern may be provided in which the estimated number of prizes is sometimes 6 and the estimated number of prizes is 6 when the game is subsequently opened. According to such an opening/closing pattern, it is possible to realize a specification in which the number of over-winning prizes is the same but the process of over-winning prizes is different.

Further, the firing timing at which the number of prizes can be expected most may be notified every time when the special winning opening is closed before the round game is executed. As a result, even if the shooting operation is stopped in the middle of the big hit game state, it is possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged because the over-winning cannot be realized.

Further, regarding the notification of the planned award quantity, when a plurality of special winning openings are opened in one big hit game state, the number corresponding to each special winning opening may be notified. For example, the total number of planned prizes is “2500”, the planned number of prize balls based on the winning of the first major winning opening is “1500”, and the number of planned prize balls based on the winning of the second major winning opening. If the number is "1000", a notification is given to display the planned number of prize balls related to the first special winning opening as "1500" and the planned number of prize balls related to the second special winning opening as "1000". You can

As a modified example of the small hit probability, for example, one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol may have a higher probability than the other. In this case, a person with a low probability of small hits includes one that does not win the small hit (winning probability 0%). In addition, there is a possibility that a person who has a high probability of a small hit will not win the small hit, and the probability of winning all the small hits other than the winning of the big hit. For example, when the update range of the random number for hit determination is 0 to 255, the big hit probability may be 1/256 and the small hit probability may be 255/256.

As a modified example of the lottery related to opening the second starting opening (lottery of the ordinary symbol game), the game ball is detected by the passage gate switch in either or both of the non-time saving game state and the time saving game state. Even if it is done, it is possible to determine either one of the unique opening or not without performing the lottery related to the opening. For example, in the non-time saving game state, it may be always open without lottery, and in the time saving game state, it may be always open without lottery. If only one of the non-time saving game state and the time saving game state is non-lottery, and if the one corresponding to the no lottery is the non-time saving game state, it is opened by lottery in the time saving game state. If the case corresponding to the non-lottery is in the time saving game state, a case where the lottery is not open in the non-time saving game state may be provided. That is, the probability of being relatively open in the time saving game state is higher than that in the non-time saving game state. Further, with respect to the opening pattern of the blade member, two or more kinds of opening patterns are provided, for example, 1 second×1 opening, 2 seconds×2 opening, and the like. A lottery may be performed regarding which of the opening patterns is used.

When the modified example of the lottery related to the small hit probability and the opening of the second starting opening is applied to each of the above-described embodiments, for example, if the specified number of winnings in the small hit is two, it is before the opening of the large winning opening. Depending on the interval between rounds or the interval during rounds between opening of the large winning opening, it is possible to realize over-winning of three or more prizes exceeding the specified winning number even in the case of a small hit. For example, the big hit probability of the second special symbol is 1/256, the small hit probability is 255/256, and, in the non-time saving game state, the lottery is unopened, while in the time saving game state, the lottery is open. In such a case, in the time saving game state, a large number of prize balls can be obtained by the small hit, and the playability can be further developed. In addition, when the big hit probability of the first special symbol is 1/256, the small hit probability is 1/256, and the probability of loss is 254/256, the interval between rounds before the opening of the special winning opening or the opening of the special winning opening Due to the interval during the round, it is possible to over-win more than three over the specified number of prizes even with a small number of small wins.

As a display for the big winning opening shutter and winning, for example, a ball detection sensor is provided near the left end and the right end of the shutter to notify the expected number of winnings per round and the actual number of winnings by means of a bar graph-like meter display or numerical display. You may do so. For example, during the predetermined period until the special winning opening opens, when the game ball is detected by the ball detection sensor on the right end side, the expected winning number is added and updated by the meter display or numerical value display, while the ball detection on the left end side is detected. When the game ball is detected by the sensor, the expected winning number is subtracted and updated by the meter display and numerical value display, and when the big winning opening is opened, the finally updated numerical value is presented and according to the numerical value. For example, a display mode such as "maximum winning!!", "medium winning!", or "small winning" may be performed.

A plurality of stage members (upper stage, main stage, etc.) may be provided in one big winning opening.

The special winning opening may be provided with a specific area therein, and when the game ball passes through the specific area in the big hit game state, the probability variation game state may be set.

As a game machine, a pachi-slot machine, a roulette machine, or a gaming machine including a slot machine can be applied.

Further, it goes without saying that the above embodiments and modifications can be appropriately combined.

The basic configurations of the present invention are listed below based on the above-described embodiments or modifications.

(Appendix A1)
A game board (game board 1) having a game area (game area 1p) in which a game medium (game ball) can roll.
A passage area (big winning opening 37) provided in the game area and through which a game medium can pass,
Displacement member (large winning opening shutter 37A, main stage 922) displaceable between a first mode (open state) in which the game medium easily passes and a second mode (closed state) in which it is difficult to pass through the passage area. And
The displacement member has a suppressing portion (suppressing portions 430, 930) capable of suppressing the traveling speed of the inflowing game medium,
The suppression unit,
When the displacement member is in the second mode, the displacement member is located at the first position (open position) capable of suppressing the traveling speed of the game medium flowing into the displacement member,
When the displacing member is in the first mode, the displacing member is located at a second position (closed position) that does not suppress the traveling speed of the game medium flowing into the displacing member as compared with when the displacing member is located at the first position. A gaming machine.
(Appendix A2)
When the displacement member is in the second mode, the suppressing portion includes a portion that becomes lower as it progresses from one end to the other end, and a support surface that supports the game medium from below (the special winning opening shutter 37A). The upper surface, the step surface 922c of the main stage 922, the inclined surface 922c'),
The passage region is formed at least below the other end of the support surface,
The gaming machine according to supplementary note A1, wherein a guide path (second guide rail 30′, guide path 924b) capable of guiding a game medium is formed to one end of the support surface of the suppressing portion.
(Appendix A3)
The game board has a penetrating portion (penetrating portion 1c) reaching the back surface of the game area,
The displacement member is arranged in the penetrating portion so that at least a part of the suppressing portion is located on the back surface side of the game area,
The gaming machine according to supplementary note A1 or A2, which has an introducing portion (introducing portion 920c) for guiding the game medium in the game area to the suppressing portion located on the back surface side of the game area.
(Appendix A4)
The suppressing portion is formed in a concavo-convex shape along the first horizontal direction (left-right direction), and is formed in a step-like shape along a second horizontal direction (front-rear direction) intersecting the first horizontal direction. The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes A1 to A3.
(Appendix A5)
Launching means (launching device 26) capable of launching a game medium to the game area,
A start-up passage area (first start-up opening 32, second start-up opening 33) which is provided separately from the passage area in the game area and through which a game medium can pass,
A game value giving means (payout device 83) capable of giving a game value (game ball) on condition that the game medium has passed through the passage area;
Specific game state transition determining means (main CPU 61) for determining whether or not to shift to a specific game state advantageous to the player (big hit game state or the like) on condition that the game medium has passed through the starting passage area.
Specific game state control means (main CPU 61) capable of controlling to a specific game state on condition that the specific game state transition determining means has obtained a determination result indicating that the specific game state is to be transitioned to,
In the specific game state, an advantageous game execution means (main CPU 61) capable of executing an advantageous game (round game or the like) for displacing the displacement member to the first mode at least once,
The advantageous game ends on the condition that a specified number (specified prize number) of game media have passed through the passage area,
When the displacement member is in the second mode, a predetermined number of game media can be flowed in,
In the specific game state, the advantageous game execution means sets a time (interval between rounds) in which the displacement member is in the second mode before executing the advantageous game, and a specific number of game media are set by the launch means. It is controllable to be a specific time when it is fired and flows into the displacement member,
When the displacement member is in the first mode after the specific time elapses, the game medium that has flowed into the displacement member passes through the passage area, thereby defining the number of passages of the passage area in the advantageous game. Can be more than a few,
In the specific game state, the number of game value grants (the number of prize balls) given by the game value giving means per one of the game media that have passed through the passage area, and the advantageous game executed by the advantageous game executing means. Based on the number of executions (round number) and the planned passage number (estimated winning number) of the game medium that can pass through the passage area according to the specific time, the planned value-added amount (plan) of the game value in the specific gaming state A planned award quantity determining means (sub CPU 71) for determining the number of prize balls),
The informing means (liquid crystal display device 4) capable of informing at least a part of the planned provision quantity determined by the planned provision quantity determination means, according to any one of supplementary notes A1 to A4. Amusement machine.
(Appendix A6)
Launching means (launching device 26) capable of launching a game medium to the game area,
A start-up passage area (first start-up opening 32, second start-up opening 33) which is provided separately from the passage area in the game area and through which a game medium can pass,
A game value giving means (payout device 83) capable of giving a game value (game ball) on condition that the game medium has passed through the passage area;
Specific game state transition determining means (main CPU 61) for determining whether or not to shift to a specific game state advantageous to the player (big hit game state or the like) on condition that the game medium has passed through the starting passage area.
Specific game state control means (main CPU 61) capable of controlling to a specific game state on condition that the specific game state transition determining means has obtained a determination result indicating that the specific game state is to be transitioned to,
In the specific game state, an advantageous game execution means (main CPU 61) capable of executing an advantageous game (round game or the like) for displacing the displacement member to the first mode at least once,
The advantageous game ends on the condition that a specified number (specified prize number) of game media have passed through the passage area,
When the displacement member is in the second mode, a predetermined number of game media can be flowed in,
During the execution of the advantageous game, the advantageous game execution means has a time necessary for the first number of game media less than the specified number to be emitted by the emission means and pass through the second passage area. After the displacement member is set to the first mode for the first time (the first opening time in the round), the displacement member is displaced to the second mode, and the second time is the second mode (in the round). It is possible to control the interval time) so that the second number of game media whose sum with the first number exceeds the specified number is launched by the launching means and flows into the displacement member.
When the displacement member is in the first mode after the second time has elapsed, the game medium that has flowed into the displacement member passes through the passage region, and thus the number of passages of the passage region in the advantageous game is described above. It is possible to exceed the specified number,
In the specific game state, the number of game value grants (the number of prize balls) given by the game value giving means per one of the game media that have passed through the passage area, and the advantageous game executed by the advantageous game executing means. Based on the number of executions (round number) and the expected number of passages of the game medium that can pass through the passage area according to the first time and the second time (estimated number of winnings), and the game value in the specific game state. And a planned award quantity determining means (sub CPU 71) for determining a planned award quantity (planned prize ball number) of
The informing means (liquid crystal display device 4) capable of informing at least a part of the planned provision quantity determined by the planned provision quantity determination means, according to any one of supplementary notes A1 to A4. Amusement machine.

(Appendix B1)
A game board (game board 1) having a game area (game area 1p) in which a game medium (game ball) can roll.
A passage area (big winning opening 37) provided in the game area and through which a game medium can pass,
A displacement member (main stage 922) displaceable between a first mode in which the game medium easily passes and a second mode in which it is difficult to pass through the passage area;
When the displacement member is in the first aspect, it can be located at the first position with respect to the displacement member, and when the displacement member is in the second aspect, the displacement member can be moved to the first position with respect to the displacement member. A passage forming member (upper lid 924, upper unit 924′) that can be located at two positions,
The passage forming member,
When located at the second position, it is possible to form a passage (passage 930) together with the displacement member that can suppress the traveling speed of the game medium that has flowed into the displacement member.
When located at the first position, by not forming at least a part of the passage together with the displacement member, the traveling speed of the game medium that has flowed into the displacement member is not suppressed as compared with when located at the second position. Is possible
A game machine capable of guiding the game medium flowing into the displacement member to the passage area when at least a part of the passage is not formed.
(Appendix B2)
When the displacement member is in the second mode, the displacement member has a lower portion as it goes from one end to the other end, and has a support surface (an inclined surface 922c' of the main stage 922) for supporting the game medium from below. Have,
The passage region is formed at least below the other end of the support surface,
The passage is formed by the support surface and the passage forming member,
When the displacement member is in the second mode, the game medium is rollable along the path from one end to the other end of the support surface,
When the displacement member is in the first mode, the game medium can roll from one end to the other end of the support surface without following the passage. ..
(Appendix B3)
The game medium that rolls along the passage when the displacement member is in the second mode is provided with a discharge port (collection port 921c) that can be discharged to the outside of the passage before being guided to the passage area. The gaming machine described in Appendix B2.
(Appendix B4)
Launching means (launching device 26) capable of launching a game medium to the game area,
A start-up passage area (first start-up opening 32, second start-up opening 33) which is provided separately from the passage area in the game area and through which a game medium can pass,
A game value giving means (payout device 83) capable of giving a game value (game ball) on condition that the game medium has passed through the passage area;
Specific game state transition determining means (main CPU 61) for determining whether or not to shift to a specific game state advantageous to the player (big hit game state or the like) on condition that the game medium has passed through the starting passage area.
Specific game state control means (main CPU 61) capable of controlling to a specific game state on condition that the specific game state transition determining means has obtained a determination result indicating that the specific game state is to be transitioned to,
In the specific game state, an advantageous game execution means (main CPU 61) capable of executing an advantageous game (round game or the like) for displacing the displacement member to the first mode at least once,
The advantageous game ends on the condition that a specified number (specified prize number) of game media have passed through the passage area,
When the displacement member is in the second mode, a predetermined number of game media can be flowed in,
In the specific game state, the advantageous game execution means sets a time (interval between rounds) in which the displacement member is in the second mode before executing the advantageous game, and a specific number of game media are set by the launch means. It is controllable to be a specific time when it is fired and flows into the displacement member,
When the displacement member is in the first mode after the specific time elapses, the game medium that has flowed into the displacement member passes through the passage area, thereby defining the number of passages of the passage area in the advantageous game. Can be more than a few,
In the specific game state, the number of game value grants (the number of prize balls) given by the game value giving means per one of the game media that have passed through the passage area, and the advantageous game executed by the advantageous game executing means. Based on the number of executions (round number) and the planned passage number (estimated winning number) of the game medium that can pass through the passage area in accordance with the specific time, the planned value-added amount (plan) A planned award quantity determining means (sub CPU 71) for determining the number of prize balls),
The informing unit (the liquid crystal display device 4) capable of informing at least a part of the planned allocation quantity determined by the planned allocation quantity determination unit, according to any one of supplementary notes B1 to B3. Amusement machine.
(Appendix B5)
Launching means (launching device 26) capable of launching a game medium to the game area,
A start-up passage area (first start-up opening 32, second start-up opening 33) which is provided separately from the passage area in the game area and through which a game medium can pass,
A game value giving means (payout device 83) capable of giving a game value (game ball) on condition that the game medium has passed through the passage area;
Specific game state transition determining means (main CPU 61) for determining whether or not to shift to a specific game state advantageous to the player (big hit game state or the like) on condition that the game medium has passed through the starting passage area.
Specific game state control means (main CPU 61) capable of controlling to a specific game state on condition that the specific game state transition determining means has obtained a determination result indicating that the specific game state is to be transitioned to,
In the specific game state, an advantageous game execution means (main CPU 61) capable of executing an advantageous game (round game or the like) for displacing the displacement member to the first mode at least once,
The advantageous game ends on the condition that a specified number (specified prize number) of game media have passed through the passage area,
When the displacement member is in the second mode, a predetermined number of game media can be flowed in,
During the execution of the advantageous game, the advantageous game execution means has a time necessary for the first number of game media less than the specified number to be emitted by the emission means and pass through the second passage area. After the displacement member is set to the first mode for the first time (the first opening time in the round), the displacement member is displaced to the second mode, and the second time is the second mode (in the round). It is possible to control the interval time) so that the second number of game media whose sum with the first number exceeds the specified number is launched by the launching means and flows into the displacement member.
When the displacement member is in the first mode after the second time has elapsed, the game medium that has flowed into the displacement member passes through the passage region, and thus the number of passages of the passage region in the advantageous game is described above. It is possible to exceed the specified number,
In the specific game state, the number of game value grants (the number of prize balls) given by the game value giving means per one of the game media that have passed through the passage area, and the advantageous game executed by the advantageous game executing means. Based on the number of executions (round number) and the expected number of passages of the game medium that can pass through the passage area according to the first time and the second time (estimated number of winnings), and the game value in the specific game state. And a planned award quantity determining means (sub CPU 71) for determining a planned award quantity (planned prize ball number) of
The informing unit (the liquid crystal display device 4) capable of informing at least a part of the planned allocation quantity determined by the planned allocation quantity determination unit, according to any one of supplementary notes B1 to B3. Amusement machine.

(Appendix C1)
Launching means (launching device 26) capable of launching a game medium (game ball),
A gaming board (gaming board 1) having a gaming area (gaming area 1p) in which the gaming medium shot by the launching means can roll.
A first passage area (first start opening 32, second start opening 33) provided in the game area and through which a game medium can pass,
A second passage area (a special winning opening 37, a second special winning opening 37) which is provided in the game area and through which a game medium can pass,
A game value giving means (payout device 83) capable of giving a game value (game ball) on condition that the game medium has passed through the second passage area;
Displacement member (large winning opening shutter 37A, second) that can be displaced between a first mode (open state) in which the game medium easily passes and a second mode (closed state) in which it is difficult to pass through the second passage area. Special winning opening shutter 37A),
When the displacement member is in the second mode, the traveling speed of the game medium that has flowed into the displacement member is suppressed, and when the displacement member is in the first mode, the travel of the game medium that has flowed into the displacement member is progressed. A suppressing portion (suppressing portion 430) that does not suppress the speed more than when the displacement member is in the second mode;
Specific game state transition determining means (main CPU 61) for determining whether or not to transition to a specific game state advantageous to the player (big hit game state or the like) on condition that the game medium has passed through the first passage area. ,
Specific game state control means (main CPU 61) capable of controlling to a specific game state on condition that the specific game state transition determining means has obtained a determination result indicating that the specific game state is to be transitioned to,
In the specific game state, an advantageous game execution means (main CPU 61) capable of executing an advantageous game (round game or the like) for displacing the displacement member to the first mode at least once,
The advantageous game ends on the condition that a specified number (specified prize number) of game media have passed through the second passage area,
When the displacement member is in the second mode, it is possible to allow a predetermined number of game media to flow in,
The advantageous game execution means, in the specific game state, the specific time (interval between rounds) during which the displacement member is in the second mode before executing the advantageous game exceeds the specified number of game media. Is controllable so that it is time to be discharged by the discharging means and flow into the displacement member.
(Appendix C2)
A third passage area (first special winning opening 36) provided in the game area, through which a game medium can pass,
A variable member (first special winning opening shutter 36A) that can be changed between a first mode in which the game medium easily passes and a second mode in which it is difficult to pass through the third passage region,
The game value giving means can give a game value on the condition that the game medium has passed through the third passage area,
The advantageous game execution means,
In the specific game state, first advantageous game execution means capable of executing a first advantageous game for displacing the changing member to the first mode at least once,
In the specific game state, a second advantageous game execution means capable of executing a second advantageous game for displacing the displacement member to the first mode at least once,
In the specific game state, after executing one of the first advantageous game and the second advantageous game, it is possible to execute the other,
The first advantageous game executed by the first advantageous game executing means ends on the condition that a prescribed number of game media have passed through the third passage area, and the gaming machine described in Appendix C1.
(Appendix C3)
The specific game state,
A first specific game state in which the specific time before the execution of at least one advantageous game is a first specific time,
The gaming machine according to Appendix C1, comprising a second specific game state in which the specific time before the execution of at least one advantageous game is a second specific time that is longer than the first specific time.
(Appendix C4)
In the specific game state, the number of game values provided (number of prize balls) provided by the game value providing unit per one of the game media that has passed through the second passage area, and the advantageous game execution unit are executed. Based on the number of executions of the advantageous game (the number of rounds) and the planned number of passages of the game medium that can pass through the second passage area (estimated number of winnings) according to the specific time, the planned gaming value in the specific gaming state A planned awarding quantity determining means (sub CPU 71) for determining an awarding quantity (a planned number of prize balls),
The gaming machine according to Appendix C3, further comprising: an informing unit (a liquid crystal display device 4) capable of informing at least a part of the planned allocation quantity determined by the planned allocation quantity determination unit.

(Appendix D1)
Launching means (launching device 26) capable of launching a game medium (game ball),
A gaming board (gaming board 1) having a gaming area (gaming area 1p) in which the gaming medium shot by the launching means can roll.
A first passage area (first start opening 32, second start opening 33) provided in the game area and through which a game medium can pass,
A second passage area (a special winning opening 37, a second special winning opening 37) which is provided in the game area and through which a game medium can pass,
A game value giving means (payout device 83) capable of giving a game value (game ball) on condition that the game medium has passed through the second passage area;
Displacement member (large winning opening shutter 37A, second) that can be displaced between a first mode (open state) in which the game medium easily passes and a second mode (closed state) in which it is difficult to pass through the second passage area. Special winning opening shutter 37A),
When the displacement member is in the second mode, the traveling speed of the game medium that has flowed into the displacement member is suppressed, and when the displacement member is in the first mode, the travel of the game medium that has flowed into the displacement member is progressed. A suppressing portion (suppressing portion 430) that does not suppress the speed more than when the displacement member is in the second mode;
Specific game state transition determining means (main CPU 61) for determining whether or not to transition to a specific game state advantageous to the player (big hit game state or the like) on condition that the game medium has passed through the first passage area. ,
Specific game state control means (main CPU 61) capable of controlling to a specific game state on condition that the specific game state transition determining means has obtained a determination result indicating that the specific game state is to be transitioned to,
In the specific game state, an advantageous game execution means (main CPU 61) capable of executing an advantageous game (round game or the like) for displacing the displacement member to the first mode at least once,
The advantageous game ends on the condition that a specified number (specified prize number) of game media have passed through the second passage area,
When the displacement member is in the second mode, it is possible to allow a predetermined number of game media to flow in,
During the execution of the advantageous game, the advantageous game execution means has a time necessary for the first number of game media less than the specified number to be emitted by the emission means and pass through the second passage area. After the displacement member is set to the first mode for the first time (the first opening time in the round), the displacement member is displaced to the second mode, and the second time is the second mode (in the round). It is possible to control the interval time) so that the second number of game media whose sum with the first number exceeds the specified number is launched by the launch means and flows into the displacement member. A gaming machine characterized by.
(Appendix D2)
A third passage area (first special winning opening 36) provided in the game area, through which a game medium can pass,
A variable member (first special winning opening shutter 36A) that can be changed between a first mode in which the game medium easily passes and a second mode in which it is difficult to pass through the third passage region,
The game value giving means can give a game value on the condition that the game medium has passed through the third passage area,
The advantageous game execution means,
In the specific game state, first advantageous game execution means capable of executing a first advantageous game for displacing the changing member to the first mode at least once,
In the specific game state, a second advantageous game execution means capable of executing a second advantageous game for displacing the displacement member to the first mode at least once,
In the specific game state, after executing one of the first advantageous game and the second advantageous game, it is possible to execute the other,
The first advantageous game executed by the first advantageous game executing means ends on the condition that a prescribed number of game media have passed through the third passage area, and the gaming machine described in Appendix D1.
(Appendix D3)
The specific game state,
A first specific game state in which the second time in at least one advantageous game is a predetermined time,
The gaming machine according to Appendix D1, further comprising a second specific game state in which the second time in at least one advantageous game is longer than the predetermined time.
(Appendix D4)
The specific game state,
In at least one advantageous game, after the displacement member is set to the first mode for the first time, the displacement member is displaced to the second mode, and the second time is the second mode, The second number of game media can be controlled so as to have a time to be emitted by the emission means and flow into the displacement member, and the displacement member before executing at least one advantageous game is the first displacement medium. It includes a specific game state that can be controlled such that the time in the two modes is a time when a number of game media exceeding the specified number is launched by the launch means and flows into the displacement member. The gaming machine described in Appendix D1 or D3.
(Appendix D5)
In the specific game state, the number of game values provided (number of prize balls) provided by the game value providing unit per one of the game media that has passed through the second passage area, and the advantageous game execution unit are executed. Based on the number of executions of the advantageous game (the number of rounds) and the planned passage number (estimated winning number) of the game medium that can pass through the second passage area according to the first time and the second time, the specific game A scheduled award quantity determining means (sub CPU 71) for determining a scheduled award quantity (scheduled prize ball number) of the game value in the state,
The gaming machine according to Appendix D3, further comprising: an informing unit (a liquid crystal display device 4) capable of informing at least a part of the planned allocation quantity determined by the planned allocation quantity determination unit.

(Appendix E1)
Launching means (launching device 26) capable of launching a game medium (game ball),
A gaming board (gaming board 1) having a gaming area (gaming area 1p) in which the gaming medium shot by the launching means can roll.
A first passage area (first start opening 32, second start opening 33) provided in the game area and through which a game medium can pass,
A second passage area (a special winning opening 37, a second special winning opening 37) which is provided in the game area and through which a game medium can pass,
A game value giving means (payout device 83) capable of giving a game value on the condition that the game medium has passed through the second passage area;
Displacement member (large winning opening shutter 37A, second) that can be displaced between a first mode (open state) in which the game medium easily passes and a second mode (closed state) in which it is difficult to pass through the second passage area. Special winning opening shutter 37A),
When the displacement member is in the second mode, the traveling speed of the game medium that has flowed into the displacement member is suppressed, and when the displacement member is in the first mode, the travel of the game medium that has flowed into the displacement member is progressed. A suppressing portion (suppressing portion 430) that does not suppress the speed more than when the displacement member is in the second mode;
Specific game state transition determining means (main CPU 61) for determining whether or not to transition to a specific game state advantageous to the player (big hit game state or the like) on condition that the game medium has passed through the first passage area. ,
Specific game state control means (main CPU 61) capable of controlling to a specific game state on condition that the specific game state transition determining means has obtained a determination result indicating that the specific game state is to be transitioned to,
In the specific game state, an advantageous game execution means (main CPU 61) capable of executing an advantageous game (round game or the like) for displacing the displacement member to the first mode at least once,
The advantageous game ends on the condition that a specified number (specified prize number) of game media have passed through the second passage area,
When the displacement member is in the second mode, it is possible to allow a predetermined number of game media to flow in,
In the specific game state, the advantageous game execution means sets a time (interval between rounds) in which the displacement member is in the second mode before executing the advantageous game, and a specific number of game media are set by the launch means. It is controllable to be a specific time when it is fired and flows into the displacement member,
When the displacement member is in the first mode after the specific time has elapsed, the game medium flowing into the displacement member passes through the second passage region, so that the second passage region in the advantageous game passes. It is possible for the number to exceed the specified number,
In the specific game state, the number of game values provided (number of prize balls) provided by the game value providing unit per one of the game media that has passed through the second passage area, and the advantageous game execution unit are executed. Based on the number of executions of the advantageous game (the number of rounds) and the planned number of passages of the game medium that can pass through the second passage area (estimated number of winnings) according to the specific time, the planned gaming value in the specific gaming state A planned awarding quantity determining means (sub CPU 71) for determining an awarding quantity (a planned number of prize balls),
A gaming machine, comprising: an informing unit (a liquid crystal display device 4) capable of informing at least a part of the planned allocation quantity determined by the planned allocation quantity determination unit.
(Appendix E2)
Launching means (launching device 26) capable of launching a game medium (game ball),
A gaming board (gaming board 1) having a gaming area (gaming area 1p) in which the gaming medium shot by the launching means can roll.
A first passage area (first start opening 32, second start opening 33) provided in the game area and through which a game medium can pass,
A second passage area (a special winning opening 37, a second special winning opening 37) which is provided in the game area and through which a game medium can pass,
A game value giving means (payout device 83) capable of giving a game value on the condition that the game medium has passed through the second passage area;
Displacement member (large winning opening shutter 37A, second) that can be displaced between a first mode (open state) in which the game medium easily passes and a second mode (closed state) in which it is difficult to pass through the second passage area. Special winning opening shutter 37A),
When the displacement member is in the second mode, the traveling speed of the game medium that has flowed into the displacement member is suppressed, and when the displacement member is in the first mode, the travel of the game medium that has flowed into the displacement member is progressed. A suppressing portion (suppressing portion 430) that does not suppress the speed more than when the displacement member is in the second mode;
Specific game state transition determining means (main CPU 61) for determining whether or not to transition to a specific game state advantageous to the player (big hit game state or the like) on condition that the game medium has passed through the first passage area. ,
Specific game state control means (main CPU 61) capable of controlling to a specific game state on condition that the specific game state transition determining means has obtained a determination result indicating that the specific game state is to be transitioned to,
In the specific game state, an advantageous game execution means (main CPU 61) capable of executing an advantageous game (round game or the like) for displacing the displacement member to the first mode at least once,
The advantageous game ends on the condition that a specified number (specified prize number) of game media have passed through the second passage area,
When the displacement member is in the second mode, it is possible to allow a predetermined number of game media to flow in,
During the execution of the advantageous game, the advantageous game execution means has a time necessary for the first number of game media less than the specified number to be emitted by the emission means and pass through the second passage area. After the displacement member is set to the first mode for the first time (the first opening time in the round), the displacement member is displaced to the second mode, and the second time is the second mode (in the round). It is possible to control the interval time) so that the second number of game media whose sum with the first number exceeds the specified number is launched by the launching means and flows into the displacement member.
When the displacement member is in the first mode after the second time has elapsed, the game medium that has flowed into the displacement member passes through the passage region, and thus the number of passages of the passage region in the advantageous game is described above. It is possible to exceed the specified number,
In the specific game state, the number of game values provided by the game value providing unit per game medium that has passed through the passage area, and the number of executions of the advantageous game executed by the advantageous game execution unit, A scheduled awarding quantity determining means for determining a scheduled awarding quantity of a game value in a specific game state based on a planned passage number of a game medium that can pass through the passage area according to the first time and the second time;
A gaming machine, comprising: an informing unit capable of informing at least a part of the planned allocation quantity determined by the planned allocation quantity determination unit.
(Appendix E3)
Notification quantity changing means (sub-CPU 71) capable of changing the quantity notified by the notification means within the range of the planned allocation quantity determined by the planned allocation quantity determining means;
Further equipped with,
The gaming machine according to supplementary note E1 or supplementary note E2, characterized in that the notifying means is capable of notifying a part of the planned addition quantity and then notifying the quantity changed by the notifying quantity changing means. ..
(Appendix E4)
A third passage area (first special winning opening 36) provided in the game area, through which a game medium can pass,
A variable member (first special winning opening shutter 36A) that can be changed between a first mode in which the game medium easily passes and a second mode in which it is difficult to pass the third passage region
The game value giving means can give a game value on the condition that the game medium has passed through the third passage area,
The advantageous game execution means,
In the specific game state, first advantageous game execution means capable of executing a first advantageous game for displacing the changing member to the first mode at least once,
In the specific game state, including a second advantageous game execution means capable of executing a second advantageous game at least once to displace the displacement member to the first mode,
In the specific game state, after executing one of the first advantageous game and the second advantageous game, it is possible to execute the other,
One of the supplementary notes E1 to E3 characterized in that the first advantageous game executed by the first advantageous game execution means ends on condition that a prescribed number of game media have passed through the third passage area. The game machine described.

1 game board 1p game area 4 liquid crystal display device (informing means)
26 Launching device (launching means)
30' Second guide rail (taxiway)
32 First starting port (starting passing area, first passing area)
33 Second starting port (starting passing area, first passing area)
34 blade member 35 passage gate 36 1st special winning opening (3rd passage area)
36A 1st prize winning shutter (changing member)
37 special winning opening, second special winning opening (passing area, second passing area)
37A special winning opening shutter, second special winning opening shutter (displacement member)
41A Out port (outlet)
43 cover member 61 main CPU (specific game state transition determination means, specific game state control means, advantageous game execution means)
71 Sub CPU (scheduled allocation quantity determination means)
83 payout device (game value adding means)
430 Suppression unit 90 Variable winning device 91 Cover member 920 Front base plate 920c Introductory part 921c Recovery port (discharge port)
922 Main stage (displacement member)
922c Stair surface (support surface)
922c' inclined surface (supporting surface)
924 Upper lid (passage forming member)
924' Upper unit (passage forming member)
924b Taxiway 930 Suppressor 930' Passage

Claims (2)

A game board having a game area in which a game medium can be rolled,
A passage area provided in the game area, through which a game medium can pass,
A determination means for determining whether or not to shift to a specific game state, which is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state, on condition that the game medium has passed through the passage area,
Game state transition means for transitioning to the specific game state based on the determination result of the determination means,
A variable winning device that is displaceable between an open state where it is easy to receive a game medium and a closed state where it is more difficult to receive a game medium than the open state,
An effect pattern determination means for determining an effect pattern based on the specific game state transferred by the game state transfer means,
Based on the effect pattern determined by the effect pattern determination means, effect execution means for executing an effect in the specific game state,
A gaming machine equipped with
In the specific game state, it is possible to execute a plurality of round games for controlling the opening and closing of the variable winning device,
In the specific game state, while the round game can be executed the same number of times, the first specific game state in which the variable winning device is opened and closed in a first opening/closing pattern, and the variable winning device is the first opening/closing pattern Including a second specific game state that opens and closes in a different second opening and closing pattern,
Even in the middle of the opening and closing control, if a predetermined number of winnings occur in the variable winning device, it is possible to execute control to end the round game of that time,
Regarding the display regarding the planned number of prizes that changes according to the opening/closing pattern of the variable winning device in one specific game state, the effect execution means initially displays a predetermined planned number of prizes at the start of the specific game state. After that, the initial display can be continuously displayed even after the round game is completed, and when the subsequent round game is started , the number of prizes displayed in the predetermined round game to be executed earlier than , The number of planned prizes that is different from the initial display increases depending on the round game to be executed so that the number of planned prizes displayed in a specific round game executed after the predetermined round game becomes larger. It is possible to execute addition display production,
A gaming machine, wherein the total number of planned prizes due to the additional display effect in the first specific game state and the total number of expected prizes due to the additional display effect in the second specific game state are different. The predetermined scheduled prize number by the initial display at the start of the first specific game state and the predetermined scheduled prize number by the initial display at the start of the second specific game state are the same. The gaming machine according to claim 1.